Cities Index.
Agenda packet

El Centro City Council
November 5, 2024

Document
Agenda packet
Meeting
November 5, 2024
Body
El Centro City Council
Pages
1,513
Original file
234.6 MB
Text extracted from the city's file for reading and search. Open the original on elcentroca.api.civicclerk.com. That file is the official record.

ETIM 4:

ETIM 5:

ETIM 6:

Object Classification Code:

Package Level 1 Width:

Package Level 1 Length:

Package Level 1 Height:

Package Level 1 GrossWeight:

Package Level 1 EAN:

Package Level 2 Units:

Package Level 2 Width:

Package Level 2 Length:

Package Level 2 Height:

Product Packing Type:

Package Level 1 Units:

EC000276 - Distribution terminal block
EC000276 - Distribution terminal block
EC000276 - Distribution terminal block
X
Container Information
57 mm
95 mm
37 mm

0.14 kg
3472599856585
75 piece
230 mm
380 mm
310 mm
Box
1 piece

Page 1166 of 1513 ends

110 KOA Speer Electronics, Inc. • 199 Bolivar Drive • Bradford, PA 16701 • USA • 814-362-5536 • Fax: 814-362-8883 • www.koaspeer.com Specifications given herein may be changed at any time without prior notice. Please confirm technical specifications before you order and/or use. 1/09/09 resistors
features
• Flameproof coating is available (specify “CFP”)
• Reduced body size (specify “CFS/CFPS”)
• Suitable for automatic machine insertion
• Marking: Beige body color with color-coded bands on CF Green body color with color-coded bands on CFP
Ivory body color with color-coded bands on CFS1/4
• Products with lead-free terminations meet EU RoHS
and China RoHS requirements
CF
carbon film leaded resistors
Axial: T26, T52, L52
Radial: VT, MT, MHT, VTP, VTE
U Forming: U, UCL
M Forming: M5, M10, M12.5
L Forming: L10, L12.5
ordering information
2 significant
figures + 1
multiplier
“R” indicates
decimal on
value <10Ω
S1/4: 0.25W
1/4: 0.25W
1/2: 0.5W
S1/2: 0.5W
CF C: SnCu
CFP
G:±2%
J: ±5%
CF 1/4 C
Termination
Material Type PowerRating
Nominal
Resistance Taping and Forming Tolerance
New Part # T52 103
A: Ammo
R: Reel
Packaging
R J
For further information
on packaging, please refer
to Appendix C.
dimensions and construction
Ceramic Core
d
D
Marking Resistive Film
Insulation Coating
Trimming Line
End
Cap
Lead
Wire
L l
C
L
CFS1/4
CFPS1/4
.126±.008
(3.2±0.2)
.134
(3.4)
.067±.008
(1.7±0.2)
.018
(0.45)

0.008 Min.
(20.0 Min.)
.024
(0.6)
.092±.012
(2.3±0.3)
.280
(7.1)
.240±0.2
(6.1±0.5)
CF1/4
CFP1/4
.024
(0.6)
.112±.012
(2.85±0.3)
.280
(7.1)
.248±.02
(6.3±0.5)
CFS1/2
CFPS1/2
.028
(0.7)
.118±.012
(3.0±0.3)
.374
(9.5)
.335±0.2
(8.5±0.5)
CF1/2
CFP1/2
Type C (max.) D d (nom.) l
Dimensions inches (mm)
EU

Page 1167 of 1513 ends

CF
carbon film leaded resistors
Resistance
Range
E-24
(G±2%)
Resistance
Range
E-24
(J±5%)
Part
Designation
Absolute
Maximum
Working
Voltage
Absolute
Maximum
Overload
Voltage
Power
Rating
@ 70°C
applications and ratings
Minimum
Dielectric
Withstanding
Voltage
CFS1/4
CFPS1/4
CF1/4
CFP1/4
CF1/2*
CFP1/2*
CFS1/2
CFPS1/2

0.25W

0.50W
300V 500V
600V
800V
700V
250V
300V
400V
350V
500V
700V

2.2Ω - 1MΩ

2.2Ω - 47kΩ 51kΩ - 100kΩ 110kΩ - 330kΩ
110kΩ - 330kΩ

2.2Ω - 100kΩ
110kΩ - 1MΩ
100kΩ - 1MΩ
360kΩ - 1MΩ
——
—
—
—

1.1MΩ - 2.2MΩ

1.1MΩ - 2.2MΩ

2.2Ω - 91kΩ
10Ω - 330kΩ
10Ω - 100kΩ
10Ω - 1MΩ

2.2Ω - 1MΩ

2.2Ω - 1MΩ

2.2Ω - 1MΩ

2.2Ω - 5.1MΩ

2.2Ω - 5.1MΩ

2.2Ω - 5.1MΩ
Derating Curve
environmental applications % Rated Power 100
80 60
40 20
-60 -40 0 40 60 80 100 160 70 20
Ambient Temperature
(°C)
0 -55 120 155 -20 140
Surface Temperature Rise Temperature Rise (°C) 60
50 40
30 20
0 25 50 75
% Rated Power
0 100
10 CF1/2, CFP1/2
CF1/4, CFP1/4
Load Life @ 70°C, 1000 Hr
Δ R/R (%) +2
+1
0 10 100 1k 10k
Resistance
(Ω)
-2 100k
-1
1M
CFP1/4
Performance Characteristics
T.C.R.
(ppm/°C)
+350 to -450 0 to -700 0 to -1000 0 to -1300
360kΩ - 1MΩ

1.1MΩ - 5.1MΩ

2.4MΩ - 5.1MΩ

2.4MΩ - 5.1MΩ

2.2Ω - 1MΩ
KOA Speer Electronics, Inc. • 199 Bolivar Drive • Bradford, PA 16701 • USA • 814-362-5536 • Fax: 814-362-8883 • www.koaspeer.com 111 Specifications given herein may be changed at any time without prior notice. Please confirm technical specifications before you order and/or use. 12/29/08 resistors
* Not recommended for new designs.

Parameter
Requirement Δ R ±(% + 0.05Ω)
Limit Typical Test Method
Resistance
T.C.R.

Measuring points are at 10mm ±1mm from the end cap.

Room temperature +100°C
Within specified
tolerance
Within specified
T.C.R.
—
—
Overload (Short time) ±1% ±0.5% Rated voltage x 2.5 or max. overload voltage for 5 seconds, whichever is lower Resistance to Solder Heat 260°C ±5°C, 10 seconds ± 1 second ±1% ±0.5% Rapid Change of Temperature -55°C (30 minutes), +125°C (30 minutes), 5 cycles ±1% ±0.5% Terminal Strength Twist 360°C, 5 times No lead-coming off and loose terminals —
Moisture Resistance 40°C ± 2°C, 90 - 95% RH, 1000 hours, 1.5 hr ON, 0.5 hr OFF cycle ±5% ±2.5% Endurance at 70°C 70°C ± 2°C, 1000 hours, 1.5 hr ON, 0.5 hr OFF cycle ±3% ±1.5%

Page 1168 of 1513 ends

                     

 
                                     

!
"
# $
%

&


' ( ) * ( + (
, -   .  - / 0 1 0 1
2  3 / -

- 4  /   5 6 / - 7 7 - 6 6 8 .      8 9  : ; < = < = > ?  ?
  @    > ?  
?
  @   
A  7 6 .  B   8  C 8 / 8 . D E F
G ' *
' H 
0 6 7 I J
0 K  I D E F
G ' *
' H 
0 6 7 I J
0 K  I
L  * M ' ( N O
+ P 3 8 . 7  - B B    8   8 Q R S T U T I =

V    U 6 -  4 
/ - 4  /   V    W X T -   W X Y T U Z  , U B - . K    3 - 6  /     7 3 8 . 4 .     7 -     7  - 6 6  7 7 8 .   7
 . - 5 [ \ ] ^ _ ] ` "
% a ! % T b
L  * M ' ( N O
+ P 3 8 . 7  - B B    8   8 Q R c T U T I S T

V    U 6 -  4 
/ - 4  /   V    W X T U B - . K    3 - 6  /   5 3 8 . 4 .     7 -     7  B / d  7  . - 5 [ \ ] ^ _ ] ` %
e
% a f ! T b
L  * M ' ( N O
+ P 3 8 . 7  - B B    8   8 Q R c T U : I T

V    U 6 -  4 
/ - 4  /   V    W X g U W X h J = i U Z  , I I I  . - 5 [ \ ] ^ _ ] ` %
% a " $ T b
– Phoenix Contact has engineered its
CLIPFIX end brackets to maintain a secure grip on the various DIN rail systems – Design width of just 5.2 mm
– Parking facility for bridges and connectors
– Large area for labeling
Snap-on end bracket, for NS 15 and
NS 35 DIN rails
CABINET add-on
Component mounting
j   k
?   l  m n? o p q r s t o ?    j   k?   l  m n? o p u r s t o ?                         

 
                                     

v

a
%
% " a

a
&


' ( ) * ( + (
, -   .  - / 0 1 0 1
2  3 / -

- 4  /   5 6 / - 7 7 - 6 6 8 .      8 9  : ; < = < = > ?  ?
  @    > ?  
?
  @   
A  7 6 .  B   8  C 8 / 8 . D E F
G ' *
' H 
0 6 7 I J
0 K  I D E F
G ' *
' H 
0 6 7 I J
0 K  I
L  * M ' ( N O
+ P 3 8 . 7 6 .  V    8  U 3 8 . Q R c T -   Q R c = U 6 -  4  / - 4  /   V    W X g U Z  , U Z  , w 1 -   9 X x
 . - 5 L y z { " a " # # T b
z 
|
'  ( )
 * M ' ( N O
+ P 3 8 . 7 6 .  V    8  U 3 8 . Q R c T -   Q R c = U 3 8 . 7 d B B 8 .           7 8 3  8 d 4 /  w /  }  / -     .   w /  }  /   .   - / 4 / 8 6 K 7 U
6 -  4  / - 4  /   V    W X S b
 . - 5 L y z { " " a " # " % T b
~  
0  € x Q 2  C € Q ‚ 1 C ‚
– With universal foot for NS 35 and NS 32
DIN rails
– High and low designs
– Large area for labeling
Screw-on end bracket, for NS 15 DIN
rail
ƒ n
? o p u r
   o p u „ s t o ?   
ƒ n
? † ‡
  ˆ   ‰   
? †
    k  n  l
n  o p u r  
o p u „ s t o ?   

Page 1169 of 1513 ends

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 1 / 2
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Aug 6, 2013
Extract from the online
catalog
FBS 4-5
Order No.: 3030187
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3030187 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 4, Color: red
Commercial data
EAN
4 017918 193829
sales group A690
Pack 50 Pcs.

Customs tariff 85389099
Gross weight in pieces 0.00339 KG
Net weight per piece 0.0036 KG
Catalog page information Page 472 (CAT-3-2013)
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
01/01/2003
http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.

Certificates / Approvals
Certification
Certifications applied for:

Certification Ex:

Page 1170 of 1513 ends

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 1 / 2
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Extract from the online
catalog
FBS 2-5
Order No.: 3030161
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3030161 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red
Commercial data
EAN
4 017918 188511
sales group A690
Pack 50 Pcs.

Customs tariff 85389099
Gross weight in pieces 0.001696 KG
Net weight per piece 0.001684 KG
Catalog page information Page 390 (CL1-2011)
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
01/01/2003
http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.

Certificates / Approvals
Certification
Certifications applied for:

Certification Ex:

Page 1171 of 1513 ends

PHOENIX CONTACT Ltd Page 1 / 2
http://www.phoenixcontact.ca 23-Jul-2012
Extract from the online
catalog
D-ST 2,5-QUATTRO
Order No.: 3030514
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.ca/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3030514 End cover, Length: 72 mm, Width: 2.2 mm, Height: 36.5 mm, Color: gray
Commercial data
EAN
4 017918 187972
Pack 1 pcs.

Customs tariff 85369010
Catalog page information Page 95 (CL1-2011)
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:

Jan/01/2003
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation at http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com.

The General Terms and Conditions
of Use apply to Internet downloads.

Page 1172 of 1513 ends

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 1 / 8
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Extract from the online
catalog
PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE
Order No.: 3209594
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3209594 Ground modular terminal block, Connection method: Push-in connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 26 - 12, Width: 5.2 mm, Color: green-yellow, Mounting type: NS 35/7.5, NS 35/15
Commercial data
EAN
4 046356 329842
sales group A633
Pack 50 Pcs.

Customs tariff 85369010
Gross weight in pieces 0.01355 KG
Net weight per piece 0.01355 KG
Catalog page information Page 97 (CL1-2011)
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
11/22/2007
http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.

Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Number of connections 4
Color green-yellow
Insulating material PA

Page 1173 of 1513 ends

PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE Order No.: 3209594
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3209594 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 2 / 8
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Inflammability class according to UL 94 V0
Dimensions
Width 5.2 mm
Length 72.2 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 36.8 mm
Height NS 35/15 44.3 mm
Technical data
Rated surge voltage 8 kV
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Insulating material group I
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-2
Open side panel ja
Shock protection test specification DIN EN 50274 (VDE 0660-514):2002-11 Back of the hand protection guaranteed
Finger protection guaranteed
Test specification, oscillation, broadband noise DIN EN 50155 (VDE 0115-200):2008-03 Test spectrum Service life test category 1, class B, on vehicle body Test frequency f1 = 5 Hz to f2 = 150 Hz
ASD level 1.857 (m/s2
)
2 /Hz
Acceleration 0.8 g
Test duration per axis 5 h
Test directions X-, Y- and Z-axis
Oscillation, broadband noise test result Test passed
Test specification, shock test DIN EN 50155 (VDE 0115-200):2008-03 Shock form Half-sine
Acceleration 5 g
Shock duration 30 ms
Number of shocks per direction 3
Test directions X-, Y- and Z-axis (pos. and neg.)
Shock test result Test passed
Temperature index, insulating material (DIN EN
60216-1 (VDE 0304-21))
125 °C
Static insulating material application in cold -60 °C

Page 1174 of 1513 ends

PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE Order No.: 3209594
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3209594 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 3 / 8
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Connection data
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 4 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max 12
Conductor cross section stranded min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded max. 2.5 mm²
Min. conductor AWG cross section, stranded 26
Max. AWG conductor cross section, stranded 14
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule
without plastic sleeve min.

0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule
without plastic sleeve max.

2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule
with plastic sleeve min.

0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule
with plastic sleeve max.

2.5 mm²
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded,
TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.

0.5 mm²
Connection method Push-in connection
Stripping length 10 mm
Internal cylindrical gage A3
Certificates / Approvals
Certification CSA, cULus Recognized, GOST, ABS, BV, GL, LR, NK, RS Certification Ex: ATEX, IECEx
Certifications applied for:

Page 1175 of 1513 ends

PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE Order No.: 3209594
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3209594 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 4 / 8
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Accessories
Item Designation Description
Assembly
3030815 ATP-ST QUATTRO Partition plate, Length: 90.9 mm, Width: 2 mm, Height: 45 mm, Color: gray
3022218 CLIPFIX 35 Snap-on end bracket, for 35 mm NS 35/7.5 or NS 35/15 DIN rail, can be fitted with Zack strip ZB 8 and ZB 8/27, terminal strip marker KLM 2 and KLM, width: 9.5 mm, color: gray
3022276 CLIPFIX 35-5 Quick mounting end clamp for NS 35/7,5 DIN rail or NS 35/15 DIN rail, can be fitted with ZB 5 and ZBF 5 zack marker strip, KLM 2, KLM3, and KML3L terminal strip marker, parking option for FBS...5, FBS...6, KSS 5, KSS 6, width: 5.15 mm, color: gray 3030514 D-ST 2,5-QUATTRO End cover, Length: 72 mm, Width: 2.2 mm, Height: 36.5 mm, Color: gray
3030513 D-ST 2,5-QUATTRO-0,8 OG End cover, Length: 72 mm, Width: 0.8 mm, Height: 29 mm, Color: orange
3036602 DS-ST 2,5 Cover segment, Length: 72 mm, Height: 36.5 mm, Color: gray 0801704 NS 35/ 7,5 AL UNPERF
2000MM
DIN rail, material: Aluminum, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1206560 NS 35/ 7,5 CAP DIN rail end piece, for DIN rail NS 35/7.5 0801762 NS 35/ 7,5 CU UNPERF
2000MM
DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
0801733 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: steel galvanized and passivated with a thick layer, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2000 mm 0801681 NS 35/ 7,5 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1204119 NS 35/ 7,5 WH PERF 2000MM DIN rail 35 mm (NS 35) 1204122 NS 35/ 7,5 WH UNPERF
2000MM
DIN rail 35 mm (NS 35)
1206421 NS 35/ 7,5 ZN PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Galvanized, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1206434 NS 35/ 7,5 ZN UNPERF
2000MM
DIN rail, material: Galvanized, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1201756 NS 35/15 AL UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, deep drawn, high profile, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, material: aluminum, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length 2000 mm 1206573 NS 35/15 CAP DIN rail end piece, for DIN rail NS 35/15 1201895 NS 35/15 CU UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1201730 NS 35/15 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: steel galvanized and passivated with a thick layer, perforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2000 mm 1201714 NS 35/15 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

Page 1176 of 1513 ends

PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE Order No.: 3209594
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3209594 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 5 / 8
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
0806602 NS 35/15 WH PERF 2000MM DIN rail 35 mm (NS 35)
1204135 NS 35/15 WH UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail 35 mm (NS 35) 1206599 NS 35/15 ZN PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Galvanized, perforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1206586 NS 35/15 ZN UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Galvanized, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1201798 NS 35/15-2,3 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, 2.3 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
Bridges
3030161 FBS 2-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red 3030174 FBS 3-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 3, Color: red 3030187 FBS 4-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 4, Color: red 3030190 FBS 5-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 5, Color: red 3030213 FBS 10-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 10, Color: red 3030226 FBS 20-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 20, Color: red 3038930 FBS 50-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 50, Color: red 3038943 RB ST (2,5/4)-1,5 Reducing bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red General
0800886 E/NS 35 N End clamp, width: 9.5 mm, color: gray 3048564 PS-8/2,3MM RD Test adapter, Color: red
Marking
0810588 GBS 5-25X12 Group marker label, snaps onto terminal center for screw, springcage and quick connection terminal blocks, labeled with a 25 x 12 mm label or manually with the B-STIFT, in the foot part with ZB 5 0809298 GBS-ZB/26X6 Group marking label, snaps onto terminal center for screw, springcage and quick connection terminal blocks, labeled with ESL 26x6 mm or EST 25x6 mm, in the foot part with Zack marker strip, length: 29 mm
3037643 STP 5-2-ZB Double marker carrier, snaps onto the spring-cage terminal blocks ST 2.5..., labeled with ZB 5 or ZBF 5
0818108 UC-TM 5 Marker for terminal blocks, Sheet, white, Unlabeled, Can be labeled with: Bluemark, Plotter, BLUEMARK CLED, Mounting type: Snap into tall marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 10.5 x 4.6 mm
0824581 UC-TM 5 CUS Marker for terminal blocks, Can be ordered: By sheet, white, Labeled according to customer specifications, Mounting type:

Snap into tall marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 10.5 x 4.6 mm

Page 1177 of 1513 ends

PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE Order No.: 3209594
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3209594 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 6 / 8
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
0818153 UC-TMF 5 Marker for terminal blocks, Sheet, white, Unlabeled, Can be labeled with: Bluemark, Plotter, BLUEMARK CLED, Mounting type: Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 4.6 x 5.1 mm
0824638 UC-TMF 5 CUS Marker for terminal blocks, Can be ordered: By sheet, white, Labeled according to customer specifications, Mounting type:

Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 4.6 x 5.1 mm
0828734 UCT-TM 5 Marker for terminal blocks, Sheet, white, Unlabeled, Can be labeled with: Thermomark C+, Thermomark C, Bluemark,
BLUEMARK CLED, Mounting type: Snap into tall marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 4.6 x 10.5 mm 0829595 UCT-TM 5 CUS Marker for terminal blocks, Can be ordered: By sheet, white, Labeled according to customer specifications, Mounting type:

Snap into tall marker groove, Lettering field: 4.6 x 10.5 mm 0828744 UCT-TMF 5 Marker for terminal blocks, Sheet, white, Unlabeled, Can be labeled with: Thermomark C+, Thermomark C, Bluemark,
BLUEMARK CLED, Mounting type: Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 4.4 x 4.7 mm 0829658 UCT-TMF 5 CUS Marker for terminal blocks, Can be ordered: By sheet, white, Labeled according to customer specifications, Mounting type:

Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 4.4 x 4.7 mm
1050004 ZB 5 :UNBEDRUCKT Zack marker strip, Strip, white, Unlabeled, Can be labeled with:

Plotter, Mounting type: Snap into tall marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 5.1 x 10.5 mm
0824962 ZB 5 CUS Zack marker strip, Can be ordered: Strip, white, Labeled according to customer specifications, Mounting type: Snap into tall marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field:

5.15 x 10.5 mm
0825025 ZBF 5 CUS Zack Marker strip, flat, Can be ordered: Strip, white, Labeled according to customer specifications, Mounting type: Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5 mm, Lettering field:

5.15 x 5.15 mm
0808642 ZBF 5:UNBEDRUCKT Zack Marker strip, flat, Strip, white, Unlabeled, Can be labeled with: Plotter, Mounting type: Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5 mm, Lettering field: 5.1 x 5.2 mm Plug/Adapter
3036725 DP PS-5 Spacer plate, Color: red
3002843 ISH 2,5/0,2 Insulation stop sleeve, Color: white 3002856 ISH 2,5/0,5 Insulation stop sleeve, Color: gray 3002869 ISH 2,5/1,0 Insulation stop sleeve, Color: black 0201731 MPS-IH BK Insulating sleeve, Color: black
0201689 MPS-IH BU Insulating sleeve, Color: blue
0201702 MPS-IH GN Insulating sleeve, Color: green

Page 1178 of 1513 ends

PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE Order No.: 3209594
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3209594 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 7 / 8
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
0201728 MPS-IH GY Insulating sleeve, Color: gray
0201676 MPS-IH RD Insulating sleeve, Color: red
0201663 MPS-IH WH Insulating sleeve, Color: white
0201692 MPS-IH YE Insulating sleeve, Color: yellow
0201744 MPS-MT Test plugs
3032871 PAI-4-N GY Test adapter, Color: gray
3030983 PS-5 Test adapter, Color: red
3038723 PS-5/2,3MM RD Test plugs, Color: red
3038736 PS-6/2,3MM RD Test plugs, Color: red
Software
5146040 CLIP-PROJECT ADVANCED Multilingual software for easy planning of Phoenix Contact on DIN rails together with the integrated TRABTECH-select software module for planning comprehensive surge protection concepts. 5146053 CLIP-PROJECT

PROFESSIONAL
Multi-lingual software for terminal strip project planning. A marking module allows professional labeling of markers and labels for marking terminal blocks, conductors, cables and devices. The additionally integrated software module TRABTECH-select for planning comprehensive surge protection concepts.

Tools
1204517 SZF 1-0,6X3,5 Actuation tool, for ST terminal blocks, also suitable for use as a bladed screwdriver, size: 0.6 x 3.5 x 100 mm, 2-component grip, with non-slip grip
Drawings
Circuit diagram

Page 1179 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209581
07/15/2016   Page 1 / 5
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO BU - 3209581 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)
Feed-through terminal block, Connection method: Push-in connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 26 - 12, Width: 5.2 mm, Height: 35.3 mm, Color: blue, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15 Why buy this product
■ The Push-in connection terminal blocks are characterized by the system features of the CLIPLINE complete system and by easy and toolfree wiring of conductors with ferrules or solid conductors ■ The compact design and front connection enable wiring in a confined space ■ In addition to the testing facility in the double function shaft, all terminal blocks provide an additional test connection ■ Tested for railway applications
Key Commercial Data
Packing unit 50 STK
Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 10.65 g
Custom tariff number 85369040
Country of origin Germany
Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Number of connections 4
Potentials 1
Nominal cross section 2.5 mm²
Color blue
Insulating material PA
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Area of application Railway industry
Machine building
Plant engineering
Process industry

Page 1180 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209581
07/15/2016   Page 2 / 5
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO BU - 3209581 Technical data
General
Rated surge voltage 8 kV
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category III
Insulating material group I
Maximum load current
28 A (In case of a 4 mm² conductor cross section, the maximum load current must not be exceeded by the total current of all connected conductors.)
Nominal current IN 24 A (with 2.5 mm² conductor connection cross section) Nominal voltage UN 800 V
Open side panel Yes
Dimensions
Width 5.2 mm
End cover width 2.2 mm
Length 72.2 mm
Height 35.3 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 36.8 mm
Height NS 35/15 44.3 mm
Connection data
Connection method Push-in connection
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-1
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 4 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm²
Min. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 26
Max. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 14
Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min. 0.14 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min. 0.14 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max. 2.5 mm² 2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max. 0.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Stripping length 8 mm ... 10 mm
Internal cylindrical gage A3
Standards and Regulations
Connection in acc. with standard CSA

Page 1181 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209581
07/15/2016   Page 3 / 5
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO BU - 3209581 Technical data
Standards and Regulations
IEC 60947-7-1
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27141121
eCl@ss 4.1 27141121
eCl@ss 5.0 27141120
eCl@ss 5.1 27141120
eCl@ss 6.0 27141120
eCl@ss 7.0 27141120
eCl@ss 8.0 27141120
eCl@ss 9.0 27141120
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000897
ETIM 3.0 EC000897
ETIM 4.0 EC000897
ETIM 5.0 EC000897
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211811
UNSPSC 7.0901 39121410
UNSPSC 11 39121410
UNSPSC 12.01 39121410
UNSPSC 13.2 39121410
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
CSA / UL Recognized / VDE Zeichengenehmigung / cUL Recognized / RS / ABS / NK / IECEE CB Scheme / BV / EAC / NK / EAC / DNV GL / cULus Recognized
Ex Approvals
ATEX / IECEx / EAC Ex
Approvals submitted

Page 1182 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209581
07/15/2016   Page 4 / 5
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO BU - 3209581 Approvals
Approval details
CSA
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
UL Recognized
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
VDE Zeichengenehmigung
mm²/AWG/kcmil 0.2-2.5
Nominal current IN 24 A
Nominal voltage UN 800 V
cUL Recognized
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
RS
ABS
NK

Page 1183 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209581
07/15/2016   Page 5 / 5
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO BU - 3209581 Approvals
IECEE CB Scheme
mm²/AWG/kcmil 0.2-2.5
Nominal voltage UN 800 V
BV
EAC
NK
EAC
DNV GL
cULus Recognized
Phoenix Contact 2016 © - all rights reserved
http://www.phoenixcontact.com

Page 1184 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 1 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)
Feed-through terminal block, Connection method: Push-in connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 26 - 12, Width: 5.2 mm, Height: 35.3 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15 Why buy this product
■ The Push-in connection terminal blocks are characterized by the system features of the CLIPLINE complete system and by easy and toolfree wiring of conductors with ferrules or solid conductors ■ The compact design and front connection enable wiring in a confined space ■ In addition to the testing facility in the double function shaft, all terminal blocks provide an additional test connection ■ Tested for railway applications
Key Commercial Data
Packing unit 50 STK
Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 10.6 g
Custom tariff number 85369040
Country of origin Germany
Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Number of connections 4
Potentials 1
Nominal cross section 2.5 mm²
Color gray
Insulating material PA
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Area of application Railway industry
Machine building
Plant engineering
Process industry

Page 1185 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 2 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Technical data
General
Rated surge voltage 8 kV
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category III
Insulating material group I
Maximum load current
28 A (In case of a 4 mm² conductor cross section, the maximum load current must not be exceeded by the total current of all connected conductors.)
Nominal current IN 24 A (with 2.5 mm² conductor connection cross section) Nominal voltage UN 800 V
Open side panel Yes
Shock protection test specification DIN EN 50274 (VDE 0660-514):2002-11 Back of the hand protection guaranteed
Finger protection guaranteed
Result of surge voltage test Test passed
Surge voltage test setpoint 9.8 kV
Result of power-frequency withstand voltage test Test passed Power frequency withstand voltage setpoint 2 kV
Result of the test for mechanical stability of terminal points (5 x conductor connection) Test passed
Result of bending test Test passed
Bending test rotation speed 10 rpm
Bending test turns 135
Bending test conductor cross section/weight 0.14 mm² / 0.2 kg

2.5 mm² / 0.7 kg
4 mm² / 0.9 kg
Tensile test result Test passed
Conductor cross section tensile test 0.14 mm²
Tractive force setpoint 10 N
Conductor cross section tensile test 2.5 mm²
Tractive force setpoint 50 N
Conductor cross section tensile test 4 mm²
Tractive force setpoint 60 N
Result of tight fit on support Test passed
Tight fit on carrier NS 35
Setpoint 1 N
Result of voltage-drop test Test passed
Requirements, voltage drop ≤ 3.2 mV
Result of temperature-rise test Test passed
Short circuit stability result Test passed
Conductor cross section short circuit testing 2.5 mm²
Short-time current 0.3 kA

Page 1186 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 3 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Technical data
General
Conductor cross section short circuit testing 4 mm²
Short-time current 0.48 kA
Result of aging test Test passed
Ageing test for screwless modular terminal block temperature cycles 192 Result of thermal test Test passed
Proof of thermal characteristics (needle flame) effective duration 30 s Oscillation, broadband noise test result Test passed
Test specification, oscillation, broadband noise DIN EN 50155 (VDE 0115-200):2008-03 Test spectrum Service life test category 2, bogie mounted Test frequency f1 = 5 Hz to f2 = 250 Hz
ASD level 6.12 (m/s2
)
2 /Hz
Acceleration 3.12 g
Test duration per axis 5 h
Test directions X-, Y- and Z-axis
Shock test result Test passed
Test specification, shock test DIN EN 50155 (VDE 0115-200):2008-03 Shock form Half-sine
Acceleration 30g
Shock duration 18 ms
Number of shocks per direction 3
Test directions X-, Y- and Z-axis (pos. and neg.)
Relative insulation material temperature index (Elec., UL 746 B) 130 °C Temperature index of insulation material (DIN EN 60216-1 (VDE 0304-21)) 125 °C
Static insulating material application in cold -60 °C
Flame test method (DIN EN 60695-11-10) V0
Oxygen index (DIN EN ISO 4589-2) >32 %
2 passed
passed
passed
28 MJ/kg
HL 1 - HL 3
HL 1 - HL 3
HL 1 - HL 3
HL 1 - HL 3
Dimensions
Width 5.2 mm
End cover width 2.2 mm
Length 72.2 mm

Page 1187 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 4 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Technical data
Dimensions
Height 35.3 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 36.8 mm
Height NS 35/15 44.3 mm
Connection data
Connection method Push-in connection
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-1
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 4 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm²
Min. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 26
Max. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 14
Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min. 0.14 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min. 0.14 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max. 2.5 mm² 2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max. 0.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Stripping length 8 mm ... 10 mm
Internal cylindrical gage A3
Standards and Regulations
Connection in acc. with standard CSA
IEC 60947-7-1
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27141121
eCl@ss 4.1 27141121
eCl@ss 5.0 27141120
eCl@ss 5.1 27141120
eCl@ss 6.0 27141120
eCl@ss 7.0 27141120
eCl@ss 8.0 27141120
eCl@ss 9.0 27141120

Page 1188 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 5 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Classifications
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000897
ETIM 3.0 EC000897
ETIM 4.0 EC000897
ETIM 5.0 EC000897
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211811
UNSPSC 7.0901 39121410
UNSPSC 11 39121410
UNSPSC 12.01 39121410
UNSPSC 13.2 39121410
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
CSA / UL Recognized / VDE Zeichengenehmigung / cUL Recognized / RS / ABS / NK / IECEE CB Scheme / BV / EAC / NK / EAC / DNV GL / cULus Recognized
Ex Approvals
ATEX / IECEx / EAC Ex
Approvals submitted
Approval details
CSA
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
UL Recognized
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12

Page 1189 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 6 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Approvals
B C
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
VDE Zeichengenehmigung
mm²/AWG/kcmil 0.2-2.5
Nominal current IN 24 A
Nominal voltage UN 800 V
cUL Recognized
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
RS
ABS
NK
IECEE CB Scheme
mm²/AWG/kcmil 0.2-2.5
Nominal voltage UN 800 V
BV
EAC
NK
EAC

Page 1190 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 7 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Approvals
DNV GL
cULus Recognized
Phoenix Contact 2016 © - all rights reserved
http://www.phoenixcontact.com

Page 1191 of 1513 ends

PHOENIX CONTACT Ltd Page 1 / 3
http://www.phoenixcontact.ca 9-Mar-2012
Extract from the online
catalog
NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM
Order No.: 0801733
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.ca/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=0801733 DIN rail, material: steel galvanized and passivated with a thick layer, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2000 mm Commercial data
EAN
4 017918 006686
Pack 2 m
Customs tariff 72287010
Catalog page information Page 341 (CL2-2011)
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:

Jan/13/2006
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation at http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com.

The General Terms and Conditions
of Use apply to Internet downloads.

Technical data
General data
Height 7.5 mm
Length 2000 mm
Width 35 mm
Material Steel
Coating Galvanized, passivated with a thick layer
Color silver
Test standard In acc. with EN 60715: 2001

Page 1192 of 1513 ends

NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM Order No.: 0801733
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.ca/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=0801733 PHOENIX CONTACT Ltd Page 2 / 3
http://www.phoenixcontact.ca 9-Mar-2012
Drawings
Dimensioned drawing

Page 1193 of 1513 ends

For technical assistance in the U.S., call 866-405-6654 (outside the U.S., see inside back cover for directory)

ELECTRICAL SOLUTIONS
B2.

Cable
Accessories
C1.

Wiring
Duct
C3.

Abrasion
Protection
C4.

Cable
Management
D1.

Terminals
D2.

Power
Connectors
E1.

Labeling
Systems
E2.

Labels
E3.

Pre-Printed
& Write-On
Markers
F.

Index
B3.

Stainless
Steel Ties
C2.

Surface
Raceway
E5.

Lockout/
Tagout
& Safety
Solutions
B1.

Cable Ties
A.

System
Overview
D3.

Grounding
Connectors
E4.

Permanent
Identification
Panduct ® Type F Narrow Slot Wiring Duct
• Narrow slot/finger design provides more slots to fit the spacing of high-density terminal blocks and other hardware
• Material: Lead-free PVC
• UL recognized continuous use temperature: 122°F (50°C) • UL 94 flammability rating of V-0
• Conforms with NFPA 79-2007 section 13.3.1 requirement for flame retardant material
• Provided with mounting holes
• Base and cover length is 6 feet
Part number shown for LG (Light Gray). For other color availability see color selection guide, page C1.48.

Base and cover sold separately.
*“H” dimension includes duct and cover.

W
H
.20 TYP [5.0]
.50 TYP [12.7]
Multiple slot restrictors present with
2" and greater duct wall height.

To order cover with protective film
add “-F” to part number. 6" cover
not available with film.

Base
Part Number
Duct Size (W x H)* Slot Width Cover
Part Number
Std.

Pkg.

Qty.

Base
Ctn.

Qty.

Cover
Ctn.

In. mm In. mm Qty.

F.5X.5LG6 0.69 x 0.60 17.5 x 15.2 0.20 5.0 C.5LG6 6 120 120 F.5X1LG6 0.69 x 1.06 17.5 x 26.9 0.20 5.0 C.5LG6 6 120 120 F.75X.75LG6 0.93 x 0.82 23.6 x 20.9 0.20 5.0 C.75LG6 6 120 120 F.75X1.5LG6 0.93 x 1.57 23.6 x 39.9 0.20 5.0 C.75LG6 6 120 120 F1X1LG6 1.26 x 1.13 32.0 x 28.7 0.20 5.0 C1LG6 6 120 120 F1X1.5LG6 1.26 x 1.62 32.0 x 41.1 0.20 5.0 C1LG6 6 120 120 F1X2LG6 1.26 x 2.12 32.0 x 53.8 0.20 5.0 C1LG6 6 120 120 F1X3LG6 1.26 x 3.12 32.0 x 79.2 0.20 5.0 C1LG6 6 120 120 F1X4LG6 1.26 x 4.10 32.0 x 104.1 0.20 5.0 C1LG6 6 60 120 F1.5X1LG6 1.75 x 1.12 44.5 x 28.4 0.20 5.0 C1.5LG6 6 120 120 F1.5X1.5LG6 1.75 x 1.62 44.5 x 41.1 0.20 5.0 C1.5LG6 6 120 120 F1.5X2LG6 1.75 x 2.12 44.5 x 53.8 0.20 5.0 C1.5LG6 6 120 120 F1.5X3LG6 1.75 x 3.12 44.5 x 79.2 0.20 5.0 C1.5LG6 6 120 120 F1.5X4LG6 1.75 x 4.10 44.5 x 104.1 0.20 5.0 C1.5LG6 6 60 120 F2X1LG6 2.25 x 1.12 57.2 x 28.4 0.20 5.0 C2LG6 6 120 120 F2X1.5LG6 2.25 x 1.62 57.2 x 41.1 0.20 5.0 C2LG6 6 120 120 F2X2LG6 2.25 x 2.12 57.2 x 53.8 0.20 5.0 C2LG6 6 120 120 F2X3LG6 2.25 x 3.12 57.2 x 79.2 0.20 5.0 C2LG6 6 60 120 F2X4LG6 2.25 x 4.10 57.2 x 104.1 0.20 5.0 C2LG6 6 60 120 F2X5LG6 2.25 x 5.10 57.2 x 129.5 0.20 5.0 C2LG6 6 60 120 F2.5X3LG6 2.75 x 3.12 69.9 x 79.2 0.20 5.0 C2.5LG6 6 120 120 F3X1LG6 3.25 x 1.12 82.6 x 28.4 0.20 5.0 C3LG6 6 120 120 F3X2LG6 3.25 x 2.12 82.6 x 53.8 0.20 5.0 C3LG6 6 120 120 F3X3LG6 3.25 x 3.12 82.6 x 79.2 0.20 5.0 C3LG6 6 60 120 F3X4LG6 3.25 x 4.10 82.6 x 104.1 0.20 5.0 C3LG6 6 60 120 F3X5LG6 3.25 x 5.10 82.6 x 129.5 0.20 5.0 C3LG6 6 60 120 F4X2LG6 4.25 x 2.12 108.0 x 53.8 0.20 5.0 C4LG6 6 60 120 F4X3LG6 4.25 x 3.12 108.0 x 79.2 0.20 5.0 C4LG6 6 60 120 F4X4LG6 4.25 x 4.10 108.0 x 104.1 0.20 5.0 C4LG6 6 60 120 F4X5LG6 4.25 x 5.10 108.0 x 129.5 0.20 5.0 C4LG6 6 60 120 F6X4LG6 6.25 x 4.15 158.8 x 105.4 0.20 5.0 C6LG6 6 60 120

Page 1194 of 1513 ends

386
160T01125
G
1 IEC UL CSA IEC UL CSA

IEC UL CSA
DBTI
DBTI

IEC UL CSA
DBTI
DBTI
17 .669”

90.5 3.56”
6 .236”
22 .866”
9 354” 25 .984”
32,5 1.27”
Ø 5.5
.216”
25 .984
50 1.98”
5 .197”

53.5 2.11”
6 .236”
22 .866”
9 354” 25
32,5
.984”

1.27”
Ø 5.5
.216”
25 .984
50 1.98”
10 mm²

1.5 Nm 13.3 Ib.in 13.3 Ib.in
M5 M5 M5
10 mm²

1.5 Nm 13.3 Ib.in 13.3 Ib.in
M5 M5 M5
DBTI
Characteristics
Connection
- Screw clamp
- Max. wire size
Torque on screw
Screw
Blue or green base - Mounting on DIN 3 rail
Bars with base for
ground wire
DIN 3
7 outputs
Type P/N
7 outputs blue base
7 outputs green base
Type P/N
12 outputs blue base
12 outputs green base
12 outputs
Blue or green base - Mounting on DIN 3 rail
M5 screw
slotted Pozidriv
cruciform head
M5 screw
slotted Pozidriv
cruciform head
7 outputs 12 outputs
center of rail center of rail
PR3.Z2 35 x 7,5 x 1 1SNA 174 300 R1700
PR4 35 x 15 x 2,3 1SNA 168 500 R1200
PR5 35 x 15 x 1,5 1SNA 168 700 R2200
Other rails : see section on accessories.

Characteristics
Type P/N Type P/N
1SNA 356 100 R1500
1SNA 356 101 R0200
1SNA 356 102 R0300
1SNA 356 103 R0400

Page 1195 of 1513 ends

www.tnb.ca A19
Mechanical Connectors
Dual-Rated Mechanical Connectors
Type ADR–ALCÜL™ — Two Conductors, One-Hole Mount
• For copper and aluminum conductors
• Easy installation – no special tools required
• Tin-plated for low contact resistance
• All aluminum bodies
Cat. No. Conductor Range Dimensions (in.)
Max. Min. L W H D E F G I
ADR11-21 1/0 str. 14 AWG 1-15/32 1-7/32 25/32 7/16 1/4 3/16 27/32 35/64 ADR21-21 2/0 str. 1-1/4 27/64 21/32
ADR25-21 250 kcmil
6 str.
2-9/16 1-41/64 1-3/16 7/8 3/8 1/4 1-9/16 13/16
ADR35-21 350 kcmil 2-7/8 1-59/64 1-1/4 1/2 1-3/4 61/64
ADR60-21 600 kcmil 2 str. 3-3/16 2-13/32 1-9/16 5/8 7/16 1-13/16 1-7/32 ADR80-21 800 kcmil 300 kcmil 3-3/8 3-3/16 1-15/16 7/8 5/8 1/2 1-3/4 1-5/8 ADR99-21 1000 kcmil 500 kcmil Type ADR–ALCÜL™ — Two Conductors, Two-Hole Mount*
• For copper and aluminum conductors
• Easy installation – no special tools required
• Tin-plated for low contact resistance
• All aluminum bodies
Cat. No. Figure Conductor Range Dimensions (in.)
Max. Min. L W H D E F G I
ADR35-22 1 350 kcmil 6 str. 4-1/4 2-19/64 1-3/8
5/8 1/2
5/16 3 1-7/32
ADR60-22D
2 600 kcmil 2 str. 5-5/16 2-3/4 1-1/2 3/8
3-1/16
1-7/16
ADR80-22D 800 kcmil 300 kcmil 6-3/16 3-1/2 1-7/8 9/16 1-13/16 ADR99-22D 1000 kcmil 350 kcmil * NEMA Spacing: 1-3/4 in. centers.

Connectors accommodating conductors 600 kcmil and larger have double row of set screws (D suffix). “E” Bolt Size
1-3/4 “E” Bolt Size
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
D
L

W I F G
L
W
D
I
G H F
H

Page 1196 of 1513 ends

System pro M compact®
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
for branch circuit protection acc. to UL 489
The miniature circuit breaker SU 200 M
is ABB’s solution for UL 489 branch circuit
protection up to 480 Y/277 V AC and
96 V DC. This circuit breaker is an allround device for AC and DC applications for universal use in North American and
global markets due to its approvals acc.
to the international standards UL, CSA
and IEC. Moreover, SU 200 M is fully
compatible with System pro M compact®
UL 489 accessories.

Features
− High performance MCB with 10 kA interrupting capacity acc. to UL 489 / CSA 22.2 No. 5 and 15 kA breaking capacity
acc. to IEC/EN 60947-2
− Certified up to In
= 40 A at 480 Y/277 V AC acc. to UL 489 /
CSA 22.2 No. 5
− Certified for AC and DC use acc. to UL and CSA
− 40 °C reference temperature acc. to UL and CSA
− Current limiting acc. to UL 489
− Clear contact position indication in red/green (”real CPI“) 2CDC021004S0014
Standards
UL 489
CSA 22.2 No. 5
IEC/EN 60947-2
Approvals
UL 489 US
CSA 22.2 No. 5 CA
VDE DE
CCC CN
Standards and approvals
2CDC021046S0014

Page 1197 of 1513 ends

2 1SXP403001B0201
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
Technical data
General Data
Standards UL 489, CSA 22.2 No. 5, IEC/EN 60947-2
Poles 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P
Tripping characteristics C, K, Z
Rated current In

0.2 - 63 A
Rated frequency f 50 / 60 Hz, DC (0 Hz)
Rated insulation voltage Ui acc. to IEC/EN 60664-1 250 V AC (phase to ground), 440 V AC (phase to phase) Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 3
IEC/EN 60947-2
Rated operational voltage Ue
1P: 230 V AC; 2P, 3P, 4P: 400 V AC
Max. power frequency recovery voltage Umax AC 1P: 253 V AC; 2P, 3P, 4P: 440 V AC Min. operating voltage 12 V AC, 12 V DC
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu 15 kA Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics ≤ 40 A: 11.25 kA > 40 A: 7.5 kA
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (1.2/50μs) 4 kV (test voltage 6.2 kV at sea level, 5 kV at 2,000 m) Dielectric test voltage 2 kV (50 / 60Hz, 1 min.)
Reference temperature for tripping characteristics 30 °C Electrical endurance In
< 30 A: 20,000 ops (AC), In ≥ 30 A: 10,000 ops. (AC);
1 cycle (2 s - ON, 13 s - OFF, In
≤ 32 A), 1 cycle (2 s - ON, 28 s - OFF, In > 32 A)

UL / CSA
Rated voltage AC
AC
AC
AC
DC
1P: 277 V AC up to 40 A for C, Z char.,
277 V AC up to 35 A for K char., 240 V AC
2P, 3P, 4P: 480 Y / 277 V AC up to 40 A for C, Z char., 480 Y / 277 V AC up to 35 A for K char., 240 V AC
1P: 48 V DC; 2P: 96 V DC (2p in series)
Rated interrupting capacity acc. to UL 1077 –
Short-circuit current rating acc. to UL 489 10 kA
Application –
Reference temperature for tripping characteristics 40 °C Electrical endurance 6,000 ops (AC), 6,000 ops. (DC); 1 cycle (1 s - ON, 9 s - OFF) Mechanical data
Housing Insulation group II, RAL 7035
Toggle Insulation group II, black, sealable
Contact position indication Real CPI (green OFF / red ON) Protection degree acc. to DIN EN 60529 IP20*, IP40 in enclosure with cover Mechanical endurance 20,000 ops.

Shock resistance acc. to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 25 g - 2 shocks - 13 ms Vibration resistance acc. to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 5g - 20 cycles at 5…150…5 Hz with load 0.8 In Environmental conditions (damp heat cyclic) acc. to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 28 cycles with 55°C/90-96% and 25°C/95-100% Ambient temperature -25 … +55°C
Storage temperature -40 ... +70 °C
Installation
Terminal Failsafe bi-directional cylinder-lift terminal Cross-section of conductors (top/bottom) solid, stranded: 35 mm² / 35 mm² flexible: 25 mm2 / 25 mm2
18 – 4 AWG
Cross-section of busbars (top/bottom) 10 mm² / 10 mm²
18 – 8 AWG
Torque 2.8 Nm
AWG 18-16: 13.3 in-lbs.

AWG 14-10: 17.7 in-lbs.

AWG 8-4: 39.8 in-lbs.

Screwdriver No. 2 Pozidrive
Mounting On DIN rail 35 mm acc. to EN 60715 by fast clip Mounting position any
Supply optional
Dimensions and weight
Mounting dimensions acc. to DIN 43880 Mounting dimension 3 Pole dimensions (H x D x W) 111 x 69 x 17.5 mm
Pole weight approx. 125 g
Combination with auxiliary elements
Auxiliary contact Yes
Signal contact Yes
Shunt trip Yes

Page 1198 of 1513 ends

1SXP403001B0201 3
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
Tripping characteristics
Tripping characteristics
Acc. to Tripping
characteristics
Rated
current
Thermal release 1) Electromagnetic release 2)
I
n
Currents:
conventional
non-tripping
current
I
1 conventional
tripping
current
I
2 Tripping
time
Range of
instantaneous
tripping
Tripping time
IEC/EN 60947-2 C 0.5 to 63 A 1.05 · In

1.3 · In
> 1 h
< 1 h 3)
5 · In
10 · In
> 0.2 s
< 0.2 s
K 0.2 to 63 A 1.05 · In

1.3 · In
> 1 h
< 1 h 3)
10 · In
14 · In
> 0.2 s
< 0.2 s
Z 0.5 to 63 A 1.05 · In

1.3 · In
> 1 h
< 1 h 3)
2 · In
3 · In
> 0.2 s
< 0.2 s
1) The thermal releases are calibrated to a nominal reference ambient temperature of 30 °C.

In the case of higher ambient temperatures, the current values fall by approx. 6 % for each 10 K temperature rise. 2) The indicated tripping values of electromagnetic tripping devices apply to a frequency of 50/60 Hz. The thermal release operates independent of frequency. 3) As from operating temperature (after I1 > 1h)
C characteristic
2CDC022002F0214

Page 1199 of 1513 ends

4 1SXP403001B0201
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
Tripping characteristics
K characteristic Z characteristic 2CDC022004F0214
2CDC022005F0214

Page 1200 of 1513 ends

8 1SXP403001B0201
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
Current limiting – Ipeak and I2t values acc. to UL 489
Type Voltage Current
A
Power Factor Phase I
peak
kA
I
2t
kA2S
SU203M-K0.2 480Y/277 10000 0.45-0.5 3 0.026 0.008
SU203M-K7 480Y/277 4095 0.45-0.5 3 2.3 11.9
SU203M-K7 480Y/277 7500 0.45-0.5 3 3.4 16.7
SU203M-K7 480Y/277 10000 0.45-0.5 3 4.6 19.0
SU203M-K20 480Y/277 4095 0.45-0.5 3 2.9 18.1
SU203M-K20 480Y/277 7500 0.45-0.5 3 4.3 28.1
SU203M-K20 480Y/277 10000 0.45-0.5 3 6.4 34.6
SU203M-K35 480Y/277 4095 0.45-0.5 3 3.4 27.9
SU203M-K35 480Y/277 7500 0.45-0.5 3 4.7 33.1
SU203M-K35 480Y/277 10000 0.45-0.5 3 9.0 72.0
SU203M-C40 480Y/277 4095 0.45-0.5 3 3.4 22.8
SU203M-C40 480Y/277 7500 0.45-0.5 3 5.1 42.5
SU203M-C40 480Y/277 10000 0.45-0.5 3 9.3 74.6
SU201M-K0.2 277 10000 0.45-0.5 1 0.7 0.092
SU201M-K7 277 4095 0.45-0.5 1 2.5 10.5
SU201M-K7 277 7500 0.45-0.5 1 3.4 16.9
SU201M-K7 277 10000 0.45-0.5 1 3.4 14.5
SU201M-K20 277 4095 0.45-0.5 1 2.8 14.7
SU201M-K20 277 7500 0.45-0.5 1 4.1 23.5
SU201M-K20 277 10000 0.45-0.5 1 4.7 32.5
SU201M-K35 277 4095 0.45-0.5 1 3.0 19.8
SU201M-K35 277 7500 0.45-0.5 1 4.7 36.5
SU201M-K35 277 10000 0.45-0.5 1 4.4 22.1
SU201M-C40 277 4095 0.45-0.5 1 3.6 22.9
SU201M-C40 277 7500 0.45-0.5 1 5.3 52.6
SU201M-C40 277 10000 0.45-0.5 1 5.9 44.9
SU203M-K63 240 4095 0.45-0.5 3 3.6 19.9
SU203M-K63 240 7500 0.45-0.5 3 5.1 33.0
SU203M-K63 240 10000 0.45-0.5 3 6.3 43.3
SU201M-K63 240 4095 0.45-0.5 1 3.9 33.8
SU201M-K63 240 7500 0.45-0.5 1 5.2 43.8
SU201M-K63 240 10000 0.45-0.5 1 6.5 61.8

Page 1201 of 1513 ends

1SXP403001B0201 9
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
Accessories and dimensional drawing
Accessory overview
2CDC092011F0014
The certification of the Accessories has been done with one accessory only.

The number of electrical operations is limited to 4,000 operations for the maximum combinations and the combinations including shunt trips.

H Auxiliary contact S2C-H6RU
(change-over contact)
S/H Signal contact S2C-S6RU
ST Shunt trip S2C-A...U 2CDC022007F0014
Dimensional drawing
SU 200 M

Page 1202 of 1513 ends


Miniature Circuit Breaker - SU200M - 3P - C - 6 ampere
SU203M-C6
Extended Product Type SU203M-C6
Product ID 2CDS273337R0064
EAN 4016779931274
Catalog Description Miniature Circuit Breaker - SU200M - 3P - C - 6 ampere Long Description SU203M-C6 Miniature Circuit Breaker C-Char., 10kA, 6A, 3P UL489 —
General Information
Minimum Order Quantity 1 piece
Customs Tariff Number 85362010
Ordering
—
Data Sheet, Technical Information 2CDC002177D0202
Instructions and Manuals 2CDC002177D0202
Popular Downloads
—
Product Net Width 52.5 mm
Product Net Depth / Length 69 mm
Product Net Height 111 mm
Product Net Weight 0.375 kg
Dimensions
—
CSA 22.2 No. 5
IEC/EN 60947-2
UL 489
Standards
Number of Poles 3
Tripping Characteristic C
Rated Current (I 6 A
n
)
Rated Operational Voltage acc. to IEC 60947-2 400 V AC
6 W
at Rated Operating Conditions per Pole 2,0 W
Power Loss
Rated Insulation Voltage (U acc. to IEC/EN 60664-1 440 V i
)
Rated Frequency (f) 50 Hz
Technical
—

Page 1203 of 1513 ends

60 Hz
DC Hz
Rated Ultimate Short-Circuit Breaking Capacity (I (400 V AC) 15 kA cu
)
Rated Service Short-Circuit Breaking Capacity (I (400 V AC) 11.2 kA cs
)
Overvoltage Category III
Pollution Degree 3
Housing Material Insulation Group I, RAL 7035
Contact Position Indication Red ON / Green OFF
Degree of Protection IP20
Remarks IP40 in enclosure with cover
20000 cycle
Terminal Type Screw Terminals
Screw Terminal Type Failsafe Bi-directional Cylinder-lift Terminal Busbar 10 / 10 mm²
Flexible with Ferrule 0.75 ... 25 mm²
Flexible 0.75 ... 25 mm²
Rigid 0.75 ... 35 mm²
Stranded 0.75 ... 35 mm²
Connecting Capacity
Tightening Torque 2.8 N·m
Recommended Screw Driver Pozidriv 2
TH35-7.5 (35 x 7.5 mm Mounting Rail) acc. to IEC 60715
TH35-15 (35 x 15 mm Mounting Rail) acc. to IEC 60715
Mounting on DIN Rail
Mounting Position Any
Operation -25 ... +55 °C
Storage -40 ... +70 °C
Ambient Air Temperature
Resistance to Shock acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 25g / 2 shocks / 13 ms Resistance to Vibrations acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 5g, 20 cycles at 5 ... 150 ... 5 Hz with load 0.8 In 28 cycles
with 55 °C / 90-96 %
and 25 °C / 95-100 %
Environmental Conditions
RoHS Status Following EU Directive 2002/95/EC August 18, 2005 and amendment Environmental
—
Maximum Operating Voltage UL/CSA 480Y / 277 V AC
Busbar 18-8 AWG
Conductor 18-4 AWG
Connecting Capacity UL/CSA
Technical UL/CSA
—
Declaration of Conformity - CE 2CDK400595D2702
Instructions and Manuals 2CDC002177D0202
RoHS Information 2CDK400596D0203
Certificates and Declarations (Document Number)
—
Package Level 1 Units 3 piece
Package Level 1 Width 121 mm
Package Level 1 Depth / Length 191 mm
Container Information
—
SU203M-C6 2

Page 1204 of 1513 ends

Package Level 1 Height 82 mm
Package Level 1 Gross Weight 1.175 kg
Package Level 1 EAN 4016779935739
Package Level 2 Units 24 piece
Package Level 2 Width 275 mm
Package Level 2 Depth / Length 395 mm
Package Level 2 Height 210 mm
Package Level 2 Gross Weight 16 kg
Package Level 2 EAN 4016779939539
ETIM 5 EC000042 - Miniature circuit breaker (MCB)
ETIM 6 EC000042 - Miniature circuit breaker (MCB)
ETIM 7 EC000042 - Miniature circuit breaker (MCB)
eClass 7.0 27141901
UNSPSC 39121614
Classifications
—
Low Voltage Products and Systems  → Modular DIN Rail Products  → Miniature Circuit Breakers MCBs Categories
—
SU203M-C6 3

Page 1205 of 1513 ends

2 Manual motor starters
Overview
Table for short-circuit ratings for 400/415 V
Standard range Performance range
MS116 MS132, MS165, MS5100
Selection parameters
Rated operational
power
Setting range for
thermal release
Type Short-circuit
breaking capacity
Type Short-circuit
breaking capacity
I

CU ICS ICU ICS

0.03 kW1) 0.1 … 0.16 A MS116-0.16 50 kA 50 kA MS132-0.16 100 kA 100 kA

0.06 kW 0.16 … 0.25 A MS116-0.25 50 kA 50 kA MS132-0.25 100 kA 100 kA

0.09 kW 0.25 … 0.4 A MS116-0.4 50 kA 50 kA MS132-0.4 100 kA 100 kA

0.18 kW 0.4 … 0.63 A MS116-0.63 50 kA 50 kA MS132-0.63 100 kA 100 kA

0.25 kW 0.63 … 1.0 A MS116-1.0 50 kA 50 kA MS132-1.0 100 kA 100 kA

0.55 kW 1.0…1.6 A MS116-1.6 50 kA 50 kA MS132-1.6 100 kA 100 kA

0.75 kW 1.6…2.5 A MS116-2.5 50 kA 50 kA MS132-2.5 100 kA 100 kA

1.5 kW 2.5…4.0 A MS116-4.0 50 kA 50 kA MS132-4.0 100 kA 100 kA

2.2 kW 4.0…6.3 A MS116-6.3 50 kA 50 kA MS132-6.3 100 kA 100 kA

4.0 kW 6.3…10 A MS116-10 50 kA 50 kA MS132-10 100 kA 100 kA

5.5 kW 8…12 A MS116-12 25 kA 25 kA MS132-12 100 kA 100 kA

7.5 kW 10…16 A MS116-16 16 kA 16 kA MS132-16 / MS165-16 100 kA 100 kA

7.5 kW 14 ... 20 A MS165-20 100 kA 100 kA

7.5 kW 16…20 A MS116-20 15 kA 10 kA MS132-20 100 kA 100 kA 11 kW 18 … 25 A MS165-25 100 kA 100 kA
11 kW 20…25 A MS116-25 15 kA 10 kA MS132-25 50 kA 50 kA 15 kW 25…32 A MS116-32 10 kA 10 kA MS132-32 50 kA 25 kA 15 kW 23 ... 32 A MS165-32 100 kA 75 kA
22 kW 30 ... 42 A MS165-42 50 kA 25 kA
22 kW 40 ... 54 A MS165-54 50 kA 25 kA
25 kW -
30 kW 52 ... 65 A MS165-65 50 kA 25 kA
37 kW 40 ... 100 A MS5100-100 70 kA 70 kA
45 kW 40 ... 100 A MS5100-100 70 kA 70 kA
1) 690 V
Type MS116 MS132 MS165 MS5100
Thermal and electromagnetic protection Yes Yes Yes Yes
Electromagnetic protection - - - -
Phase loss sensitivity Yes Yes Yes
Switch position ON/OFF ON/OFF/TRIP ON/OFF/TRIP ON/OFF/TRIP Magnetic trip indication - Yes Yes
Lockable handle without accessories - Yes Yes Yes
Disconnecting feature Yes Yes Yes Yes
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 90 mm
Rated operational current I
e

0.16 ... 32 A 0.16 ... 32 A 16 ... 65 A 100 A
Setting range 0.1 ... 32 A 0.1 ... 32 A 10 ... 65 A 40 ... 100 A 2) Ambient air temperature -25 ... +55 °C 1) -25 ... +60 °C 1) -20 ... +60 °C 1) -25 ... +70 °C 1) Compensated
2) For motor loads only up to 80 A
Accessories
Auxiliary contact HKF1, HK1 AUX
Signalling
contact
for tripped alarm SK1 -
for short-circuit alarm - CK1 -
Shunt trip AA1 SOR-C
Undervoltage release UA1 UVR-C
2/4 | ABB

Page 1206 of 1513 ends

2 Standard range Performance range Transformer protection MO132 MO132, MO165, MO5100 MS132-T
Type Short-circuit
breaking capacity
Type Short-circuit
breaking capacity
Type Short-circuit
breaking capacity
I

CU ICS ICU ICS ICU / ICS
MO132-0.16 100 kA 100 kA MO132-0.16 100 kA 100 kA MS132-0.16T 100 kA MO132-0.25 100 kA 100 kA MO132-0.25 100 kA 100 kA MS132-0.25T 100 kA MO132-0.4 100 kA 100 kA MO132-0.4 100 kA 100 kA MS132-0.4T 100 kA MO132-0.63 100 kA 100 kA MO132-0.63 100 kA 100 kA MS132-0.63T 100 kA MO132-1.0 100 kA 100 kA MO132-1.0 100 kA 100 kA MS132-1.0T 100 kA MO132-1.6 100 kA 100 kA MO132-1.6 100 kA 100 kA MS132-1.6T 100 kA MO132-2.5 100 kA 100 kA MO132-2.5 100 kA 100 kA MS132-2.5T 100 kA MO132-4.0 100 kA 100 kA MO132-4.0 100 kA 100 kA MS132-4.0T 100 kA MO132-6.3 100 kA 100 kA MO132-6.3 100 kA 100 kA MS132-6.3T 100 kA MO132-10 100 kA 100 kA MO132-10 100 kA 100 kA MS132-10T 100 kA MO132-12 100 kA 100 kA MO132-12 100 kA 100 kA MS132-12T 100 kA MO132-16 100 kA 100 kA MO132-16 / MO165-16 100 kA 100 kA MS132-16T 100 kA MO165-20 100 kA 100 kA
MO132-20 100 kA 100 kA MO132-20 100 kA 100 kA MS132-20T 100 kA MO132-25 50 kA 50 kA MO132-25 / MO165-25 50 kA / 100 kA 50 kA / 100 kA MS132-25T 50 kA MO132-32 50 kA 25 kA MO132-32 50 kA 25 kA Transformer protection:

The instantaneous short-circuit current
setting is 20 times the rated operational
current.

MO165-32 100 kA 50 kA
MO165-42 50 kA 25 kA
MO165-54 50 kA 25 kA
MO5100-70 36 kA 36 kA
MO165-65 50 kA 25 kA
MO5100-80 36 kA 36 kA
MO5100-100 36 kA 36 kA
MO132 MO165 MO5100 MS132-T
- - - Yes
Yes Yes Yes -
- - - Yes

ON/OFF/TRIP ON/OFF/TRIP ON/OFF/TRIP ON/OFF/TRIP
- - - Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
45 mm 55 mm 76.2 mm 45 mm

0.16 ... 32 A 16 ... 65 A 70 ... 100 A 0.16 ... 32 A
- - - 0.1 ... 25 A
-25 ... +60 °C -25 ... +60 °C -25 ... +70 °C -25 ... +60 °C 1) HKF1, HK1 AUX HKF1
SK1 - SK1
- - CK1
AA1 SOR-C AA1
UA1 UVR-C UA1
ABB | 2/5
2CDC131055C0201

Page 1207 of 1513 ends

2/6 | ABB
2CDC131062C0201
MS116 manual motor starters

0.10 to 32 A – with thermal and electromagnetic protection Description
MS116 is a compact and economic range for motor protection up to 15 kW (400 V) / 32 A in width of 45 mm. Further features are the build-in disconnect function, temperature compensation, trip-free mechanism and a rotary handle with a clear switch position indication. The manual motor starter is suitable for three- and single-phase applications. Auxiliary contacts, signaling contacts, undervoltage releases, shunt trips, power in-feed blocks and locking devices for protection against unauthorized changes are available as accessory. These are suitable throughout the MS116/MS132/MS165-range.

Ordering details
Rated
operational
power
400 V
AC-3
Setting
range
Short-circuit
breaking
capacity ICS at
400 V AC
Rated instantaneous shortcircuit current
setting li
Type Order code Weight
(1 pc)
kW A kA A kg

0.03 2) 0.10 ... 0.16 50 2.00 1) MS116-0.16 1SAM250000R1001 0.225

0.06 0.16 ... 0.25 50 3.10 1) MS116-0.25 1SAM250000R1002 0.225

0.09 0.25 ... 0.40 50 5.00 1) MS116-0.4 1SAM250000R1003 0.225

0.18 0.40 ... 0.63 50 7.90 1) MS116-0.63 1SAM250000R1004 0.225

0.25 0.63 ... 1.00 50 12.5 1) MS116-1.0 1SAM250000R1005 0.225

0.55 1.00 ... 1.60 50 20.0 1) MS116-1.6 1SAM250000R1006 0.265

0.75 1.60 ... 2.50 50 31.3 1) MS116-2.5 1SAM250000R1007 0.265

1.50 2.50 ... 4.00 50 50.0 MS116-4.0 1SAM250000R1008 0.265

2.20 4.00 ... 6.30 50 78.8 MS116-6.3 1SAM250000R1009 0.265

4.00 6.30 ... 10.0 50 150 MS116-10 1SAM250000R1010 0.265

5.50 8.00 ... 12.0 25 180 MS116-12 1SAM250000R1012 0.265

7.50 10.0 ... 16.0 16 240 MS116-16 1SAM250000R1011 0.265

7.50 16.0 ... 20.0 10 300 MS116-20 1SAM250000R1013 0.310

11.0 20.0 ... 25.0 10 375 MS116-25 1SAM250000R1014 0.310

15.0 25.0 ... 32.0 10 480 MS116-32 1SAM250000R1015 0.310

0.03 2) 0.10 ... 0.16 50 2.00 1) MS116-0.16-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1001 0.240

0.06 0.16 ... 0.25 50 3.10 1) MS116-0.25-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1002 0.240

0.09 0.25 ... 0.40 50 5.00 1) MS116-0.4-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1003 0.240

0.18 0.40 ... 0.63 50 7.90 1) MS116-0.63-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1004 0.240

0.25 0.63 ... 1.00 50 12.5 1) MS116-1.0-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1005 0.240

0.55 1.00 ... 1.60 50 20.0 1) MS116-1.6-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1006 0.280

0.75 1.60 ... 2.50 50 31.3 1) MS116-2.5-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1007 0.280

1.50 2.50 ... 4.00 50 50.0 MS116-4.0-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1008 0.280

2.20 4.00 ... 6.30 50 78.8 MS116-6.3-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1009 0.280

4.00 6.30 ... 10.0 50 150 MS116-10.0-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1010 0.280

5.50 8.00 ... 12.0 25 180 MS116-12.0-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1012 0.280

7.50 10.0 ... 16.0 16 240 MS116-16.0-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1011 0.280

7.50 16.0 ... 20.0 10 300 MS116-20-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1013 0.326

11.0 20.0 ... 25.0 10 375 MS116-25-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1014 0.326

15.0 25.0 ... 32.0 10 480 MS116-32-HKF1-11 1SAM250005R1015 0.326 Note: Manual motor starters should always be selected so that the actual motor current is within the setting range. 1) The data is valid for products, produced after week 34, 2014. 2) 690 V
2CDC241010F0011
MS116-16
2CDC241001F0011
MS116-25
2CDC241013F0011
MS116-0.16-HKF1-11
2CDC241012F0011
MS116-32-HKF1-11
Main dimensions mm, inches

0.06"

0.07"

0.55"

3.54"

1.77"

0.55"

1.38"

0.22"

1.77"

2.3"

2.76"

1.71"

3.15"

1.1"

2.95"

1.5 1.7
14 14
90 45
35 5.5
45 57.8
70 43.5

80.1 27.5
75 2CDC242002F0010

1.77"

2.3"

1.38"

0.22"

2.75"

1.7"

3.15"

0.55"

3.85"

2.95"

0.55"

0.06"

0.07"

1.1"
45 57.8
35 5.5

69.8 43.3

79.9 14 14
75 97.8

1.5 1.7

27.5 2CDC242001F0011
MS116 ≤ 16 A & MS116-HKF1-11 ≤ 16 A MS116 ≥ 20 A & MS116-HKF1-11 ≥ 20 A 2

Page 1208 of 1513 ends

ABB | 2/7
2CDC131062C0201
MS132 manual motor starters

0.10 to 32 A – with thermal and electromagnetic protection Description
MS132 is a compact and powerful range for motor protection up to 15 kW (400 V) / 32 A in width of 45 mm.

This type has also a clear and reliable indication of fault in a separate window in the event of short-circuit tripping. Further features are the build-in disconnect function, temperature compensation, trip-free mechanism and a rotary handle with a clear switch position indication. The manual motor starter is suitable for three- and single-phase applications. The handle is lockable to protect against unauthorized changes. Auxiliary contacts, signaling contacts, undervoltage releases, shunt trips, power in-feed blocks are available as accessory. These are suitable throughout the MS116/MS132/MS165-range.

Ordering details
Rated
operational
power
400 V
AC-3
Setting
range
Short-circuit
breaking
capacity ICS at
400 V AC
Rated instantaneous shortcircuit current
setting li
Type Order code Weight
(1 pc)
kW A kA A kg

0.03 2) 0.10 … 0.16 100 2.00 1) MS132-0.16 1SAM350000R1001 0.215

0.06 0.16 … 0.25 100 3.10 1) MS132-0.25 1SAM350000R1002 0.215

0.09 0.25 … 0.40 100 5.00 1) MS132-0.4 1SAM350000R1003 0.215

0.18 0.40 … 0.63 100 7.90 1) MS132-0.63 1SAM350000R1004 0.215

0.25 0.63 … 1.00 100 12.5 1) MS132-1.0 1SAM350000R1005 0.215

0.55 1.00 … 1.60 100 20.0 1) MS132-1.6 1SAM350000R1006 0.265

0.75 1.60 … 2.50 100 31.3 1) MS132-2.5 1SAM350000R1007 0.265

1.50 2.50 … 4.00 100 50.0 MS132-4.0 1SAM350000R1008 0.265

2.20 4.00 … 6.30 100 78.8 MS132-6.3 1SAM350000R1009 0.265

4.00 6.30 … 10.0 100 150 MS132-10 1SAM350000R1010 0.265

5.50 8.00 … 12.0 100 180 MS132-12 1SAM350000R1012 0.310

7.50 10.0 … 16.0 100 240 MS132-16 1SAM350000R1011 0.310

7.50 16.0 … 20.0 100 300 MS132-20 1SAM350000R1013 0.310

11.0 20.0 … 25.0 50 375 MS132-25 1SAM350000R1014 0.310

15.0 25.0 … 32.0 25 480 MS132-32 1SAM350000R1015 0.310

0.03 2) 0.10 ... 0.16 100 2.00 1) MS132-0.16-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1001 0.231

0.06 0.16 ... 0.25 100 3.10 1) MS132-0.25-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1002 0.231

0.09 0.25 ... 0.40 100 5.00 1) MS132-0.4-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1003 0.231

0.18 0.40 ... 0.63 100 7.90 1) MS132-0.63-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1004 0.231

0.25 0.63 ... 1.00 100 12.5 1) MS132-1.0-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1005 0.231

0.55 1.00 ... 1.60 100 20.0 1) MS132-1.6-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1006 0.281

0.75 1.60 ... 2.50 100 31.3 1) MS132-2.5-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1007 0.281

1.50 2.50 ... 4.00 100 50.0 MS132-4.0-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1008 0.281

2.20 4.00 ... 6.30 100 78.8 MS132-6.3-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1009 0.281

4.00 6.30 ... 10.0 100 150 MS132-10.0-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1010 0.281

5.50 8.00 ... 12.0 100 180 MS132-12.0-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1012 0.326

7.50 10.0 ... 16.0 100 240 MS132-16.0-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1011 0.326

7.50 16.0 ... 20.0 100 300 MS132-20-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1013 0.326

11.0 20.0 ... 25.0 50 375 MS132-25-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1014 0.326

15.0 25.0 ... 32.0 25 480 MS132-32-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1015 0.326 Note: Manual motor starters should always be selected so that the actual motor current is within the setting range. 1) The data is valid for products, produced after week 34, 2014. 2) 690 V
1SBC101232F0010
MS132-10
2CDC241001F0011
MS132-32
2CDC241014F0011
MS132-0.16-HKF1-11
2CDC241015F0011
MS132-32-HKF1-11
Main dimensions mm, inches 1.38" 0.1" 3.54" 2.95"

0.06" 0.22"

0.55"

1.77"

0.55"

2.85"

3.2"

1.71"

1.77"
35 1.7
90 75

1.5 5.5
14 45
14 72.4

81.25 43.5
45"
2CDC242015F0009

0.06" 0.22" 0.22"

2.84"

3.19"

0.1"

3.85"

1.77"

0.55" 0.55"

1.77"

2.95"

1.38"

1.5 5.5 43.3

72.2 81.05

1.7 97.8
45 14 14
45 75
35 2CDC242016F0009
MS132 ≤ 10 A MS132 ≥ 12 A
2

Page 1209 of 1513 ends

2/8 | ABB
2CDC131062C0201
MS165 manual motor starters
10 to 65 A – with thermal and electromagnetic protection Description
MS165 is a compact and powerful range for motor protection up to 30 kW (400 V) / 65 A in width of 55 mm.

This type has also a clear and reliable indication of fault in a separate window in the event of short-circuit tripping. Further features are the build-in disconnect function, temperature compensation, trip-free mechanism and a rotary handle with a clear switch position indication. The manual motor starter is suitable for three- and single-phase applications. The handle is lockable to protect against unauthorized changes. Auxiliary contacts, signaling contacts, undervoltage releases, shunt trips, power in-feed blocks are available as accessory. These are suitable throughout the MS116/MS132/MS165-range.

Ordering details
Rated
operational
power
400 V
AC-3
Setting
range
Short-circuit
breaking
capacity ICS at
400 V AC
Rated instantaneous shortcircuit current
setting li
Type Order code Weight
(1 pc)
kW A kA A kg

7.5 10 ... 16 100 240 MS165-16 1SAM451000R1011 0.950

7.5 14 ... 20 100 300 MS165-20 1SAM451000R1012 0.950
11 18 ... 25 100 375 MS165-25 1SAM451000R1013 0.960
15 23 ... 32 75 480 MS165-32 1SAM451000R1014 0.970
22 30 ... 42 25 630 MS165-42 1SAM451000R1015 0.970
22 40 ... 54 25 810 MS165-54 1SAM451000R1016 0.970
30 52 ... 65 25 975 MS165-65 1SAM451000R1017 0.980
Note: Manual motor starters should always be selected so that the actual motor current is within the setting range. 2CDC241004V0015
MS165-65
Main dimensions mm, inches
55 17.5 17.5

95.5 122.1

5.5 93.5
106

1.75 142.65
35 76.35

44.9 2.05

2.17"

0.69" 0.69"

3.76"

4.81"

0.22"

3.68"

4.17"

0.07"

5.62"

1.38"

3.01"

1.77"

0.08"
2CDC242001F0014
MS165
2

Page 1210 of 1513 ends

MS Series
Manual motor
protectors
4 Accessories
For Types MS116, MS132, MS45x, MS49x
Close couplers for contactors
Manual motor protector
Miniature
contactors AF contactors AS contactors A / AE Contactors Catalog
number
B6...B7BC6...BC7AF09...AF16AF09Z...AF16ZAF26...AF38AF26Z...AF38ZAF50...AF75AF95...AF110AS09...AS16ASL09...ASL16A50...A75, AE50...AE75A95...A110 MS116-0.16…16
• • BEA7/132
• • BEA16-4
• • BEA26-4
• • BEA16-3
MS116-20…25 • • BEA16-4
• • BEA38-4
MS116-32 • • BEA38-4
MS132-0.16…10
• • BEA7/132
• • BEA16-4
• • BEA26-4
• • BEA16-3
MS132-12…16
• • BEA7/132
• • BEA16-4
• • BEA38-4
• • BEA16-3
MS132-20…25 • • BEA16-4
• • BEA38-4
MS132-32 • • BEA38-4
MS45x-40…50 • • BEA50/450
MS49x-40…100 • • BEA75/495
MS495-40…100 • • BEA110/495
Note: For spring terminated AS/ASL, use part number BEA16-3U with integral wire leads for spring terminals.

Close couplers for softstarters
Manual motor protector
PSR Softstarters
Catalog
number
PSR3…PSR16PSR25…PSR30PSR37…PSR45PSR60…PSR105
MS116-0.16…16 • PSR16-MS116
MS116-20…32 • PSR30-MS132
MS132-0.16…10 • PSR16-MS116
MS132-12…32 • PSR30-MS132
MS45x-40…50 • PSR45-MS450
MS49x-40…100 • PSR105-MS495
MS132 + PSR Softstarter MS132 + AF Contactor BEA16-4 BEA16-3 Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 888.723.4773 - Web: www.clrwtr.com - Email: [email protected]

Page 1211 of 1513 ends

AC / DC Control supply Type AF09 AF12 AF16 AF26 AF30 AF38 AF40 AF52 AF65 AF80 AF96 IEC AC-3 Rated operational power
θ ≤ 60 °C for AF09 ... AF370
θ ≤ 55 °C for AF400 ... AF2650
220 - 230 - 240 V kW 2.2 3 4 6.5 9 11 11 15 18.5 22 25
380 - 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 45
415 V kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
440 V kW 4 5.5 9 15 18.5 22 22 30 37 45 55
500 V kW 5.5 7.5 9 15 18.5 22 22 30 37 45 55
690 V kW 5.5 7.5 9 15 18.5 22 22 30 37 45 55
1000 V kW — — — — — — — — — 35 40
Rated operational current 380 - 400 V A 9 12 18 26 32 38 40 53 65 80 96 AC-1 Rated operational current θ ≤ 40 °C, 690 V A 25 28 30 45 50 50 70 100 105 125 130 UL / CSA 1-phase motor rating 120 V hp 0.75 1 1.5 2 2 2 3 3 5 7.5 7.5 240 V hp 1.5 2 3 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 15 20
3-phase motor rating 200 - 208 V hp 2 3 5 7.5 10 10 10 15 20 25 30 220 - 240 V hp 2 3 5 7.5 10 10 15 20 25 30 30
440 - 480 V hp 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 60
550 - 600 V hp 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 75
General use rating 600 V A 25 28 30 45 50 50 60 80 90 105 115 NEMA NEMA Size 00 0 — 1 — — 2 — — 3 —
Main accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks Front mounting CA4-10 (1 x N.O.) CA4-01 (1 x N.C.)
Side mounting CAL4-11 (1 x N.O. + 1 x N.C.)
Timers Electronic TEF4-ON
TEF4-OFF
Interlocking units Mechanical VM4 VM96-4
Mechanical / Electrical VEM4
Connection sets For reversing contactors BER16-4 BER38-4 BER65-4 BER96-4 Surge suppressors Built-in surge protection
Overload relays
Thermal relays Class 10
(Class 10A for TF140, TA200DU)
TF42 (0.10…38 A) TF65 (22...67 A) TF96 (40...96 A)
Electronic relays Class 10E, 20E, 30E EF19 (0.10…18.9 A) EF19 (0.10…18.9 A) EF45 (9…45 A)
EF65 (20...70 A) EF96 (36...100 A)
Manual motor starters
Thermal / magnetic protection
Class 10
MS116 (0.10...32 A)
lcs up to 50 kA for class 10 A
MS165 (10...65 A)
lcs up to 100 kA (1)
MS5100 (40…100 A)
Ics up to 50 kA
MS132 (0.10...32 A)
lcs up to 100 kA
MS495 (45…100 A)
Ics up to 50 kA
MS497 (22…100 A)
Ics up to 100 kA
Magnetic only types MO132 (0.16...32 A)
Ics up to 100 kA
MO165 (16...65 A)
lcs up to 100 kA (1)
MO5100 (70…100 A)
Ics up to 36 kA
MO496 (32…100 A)
Ics up to 100 kA
MO495 (63…100 A)
Ics up to 50 kA
Accessories For contactor mounting BEA16-4 BEA38-4 BEA65-4 (2) (1) MS165/MO165 are suitable for use with AF09 ... AF30 for North american applications. (2) BEA65-4 suitable for MS165 and MO165 only.
3-pole contactors, for motor control and power switching 5/82 | ABB
5

Page 1212 of 1513 ends

1SBC101011V0014
AF09-30-10
1SBC101001V0014
AF26-30-00
AF09 ... AF38 3-pole contactors
4 to 18.5 kW
AC / DC operated
Description
AF09 ... AF38 contactors are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors and power circuits up to 690 V AC and 220 V DC. These contactors are of the block type design with 3 main poles. – control circuit: AC or DC operated with electronic coil interface accepting a wide control voltage range (e.g. 100...250 V AC and DC), only 4 control voltage ranges covering 24...500V 50/60 Hz and

20...500 V DC
- can manage large control voltage variations
- reduced panel energy consumption
- very distinct closing and opening.
– built-in surge suppression
– add-on auxiliary contact blocks for front or side mounting and a wide range of accessories.

Ordering details
IEC UL/CSA Rated control circuit
voltage
Uc min. … Uc max.

Auxiliary
contacts
fitted
Type
(1)
Order code Weight
Pkg
(1 pce)
Rated operational 3-phase
motor
rating
General
use
rating
power current
θ ≤ 40 °C
400 V 480 V 600 V AC
AC-3 AC-1
kW A hp A V 50/60 Hz V DC kg
4 25 5 25 24...60 - (2) 1 0 AF09-30-10-41 1SBL137001R4110 0.270 0 1 AF09-30-01-41 1SBL137001R4101 0.270

48...130 48...130 1 0 AF09-30-10-12 1SBL137001R1210 0.270 0 1 AF09-30-01-12 1SBL137001R1201 0.270
100...250 100...250 1 0 AF09-30-10-13 1SBL137001R1310 0.270 0 1 AF09-30-01-13 1SBL137001R1301 0.270
250...500 250...500 1 0 AF09-30-10-14 1SBL137001R1410 0.310 0 1 AF09-30-01-14 1SBL137001R1401 0.310

5.5 28 7.5 28 24...60 - (2) 1 0 AF12-30-10-41 1SBL157001R4110 0.270 0 1 AF12-30-01-41 1SBL157001R4101 0.270

48...130 48...130 1 0 AF12-30-10-12 1SBL157001R1210 0.270 0 1 AF12-30-01-12 1SBL157001R1201 0.270
100...250 100...250 1 0 AF12-30-10-13 1SBL157001R1310 0.270 0 1 AF12-30-01-13 1SBL157001R1301 0.270
250...500 250...500 1 0 AF12-30-10-14 1SBL157001R1410 0.310 0 1 AF12-30-01-14 1SBL157001R1401 0.310

7.5 30 10 30 24...60 - (2) 1 0 AF16-30-10-41 1SBL177001R4110 0.270 0 1 AF16-30-01-41 1SBL177001R4101 0.270

48...130 48...130 1 0 AF16-30-10-12 1SBL177001R1210 0.270 0 1 AF16-30-01-12 1SBL177001R1201 0.270
100...250 100...250 1 0 AF16-30-10-13 1SBL177001R1310 0.270 0 1 AF16-30-01-13 1SBL177001R1301 0.270
250...500 250...500 1 0 AF16-30-10-14 1SBL177001R1410 0.310 0 1 AF16-30-01-14 1SBL177001R1401 0.310
11 45 15 45 24...60 - (2) 0 0 AF26-30-00-41 1SBL237001R4100 0.310

48...130 48...130 0 0 AF26-30-00-12 1SBL237001R1200 0.310 100...250 100...250 0 0 AF26-30-00-13 1SBL237001R1300 0.310 250...500 250...500 0 0 AF26-30-00-14 1SBL237001R1400 0.350 15 50 20 50 24...60 - (2) 0 0 AF30-30-00-41 1SBL277001R4100 0.310

48...130 48...130 0 0 AF30-30-00-12 1SBL277001R1200 0.310 100...250 100...250 0 0 AF30-30-00-13 1SBL277001R1300 0.310 250...500 250...500 0 0 AF30-30-00-14 1SBL277001R1400 0.350

18.5 50 25 50 24...60 - (2) 0 0 AF38-30-00-41 1SBL297001R4100 0.310

48...130 48...130 0 0 AF38-30-00-12 1SBL297001R1200 0.310 100...250 100...250 0 0 AF38-30-00-13 1SBL297001R1300 0.310 250...500 250...500 0 0 AF38-30-00-14 1SBL297001R1400 0.350 (1) For other auxiliary contacts arrangements, please contact your ABB local sales organization. (2) For 24...60 V 50/60 Hz - 20...60 V DC, use AF..Z-30-..-21.

Main dimensions mm, inches
45 1.77"
80 3.15"
6 0.24"
77 3.03"
71 2.80"

5.5 0.22"
35 mm EN/IEC 60715
10 0.39"

5.5 0.22"
AF09, AF12, AF16
45 1.77"
80 3.15"
6 0.24"
86 3.39"
80 3.15"
10 0.39"
35 mm EN/IEC 60715

5.5 0.22"

5.5 0.22"
AF26, AF30, AF38
5/84 | ABB
1SBC101371S0201 - Rev. C
5

Page 1213 of 1513 ends

1SBC101011V0014
AF09Z-30-10
1SBC101001V0014
AF26Z-30-00
AF09Z ... AF38Z 3-pole contactors
4 to 18.5 kW
AC / DC operated - low consumption
Main dimensions mm, inches
45 1.77"
80 3.15"
6 0.24"
77 3.03"
71 2.80"

5.5 0.22"
35 mm EN/IEC 60715
10 0.39"

5.5 0.22"
AF09Z, AF12Z, AF16Z
45 1.77"
80 3.15"
6 0.24"
86 3.39"
80 3.15"
10 0.39"
35 mm EN/IEC 60715

5.5 0.22"

5.5 0.22"
AF26Z, AF30Z, AF38Z
Description
AF09Z ... AF38Z contactors are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors and power circuits up to 690 V AC and 220 V DC. These contactors are of the block type design with 3 main poles. – control circuit: AC or DC operated with electronic coil interface accepting a wide control voltage range (e.g. 100...250 V AC and DC), only 4 control voltage ranges covering 24...250 V 50/60 Hz and

12...250 V DC
- can manage large control voltage variations
- allow direct control by PLC-output ≥ 24 V DC 500 mA
- reduced panel energy consumption
- very distinct closing and opening
- can withstand short voltage dips and voltage sags (SEMI F47-0706 conditions of use on request). – built-in surge suppression
– add-on auxiliary contact blocks for front or side mounting and a wide range of accessories.

Ordering details
IEC UL/CSA Rated control circuit
voltage
Uc min. … Uc max.

Auxiliary
contacts
fitted
Type
(1)
Order code Weight
Pkg
(1 pce)
Rated operational 3-phase
motor
rating
General
use
rating
power current
θ ≤ 40 °C
400 V 480 V 600 V AC
AC-3 AC-1
kW A hp A V 50/60 Hz V DC kg
4 25 5 25 - 12...20 1 0 AF09Z-30-10-20 1SBL136001R2010 0.310 0 1 AF09Z-30-01-20 1SBL136001R2001 0.310

24...60 20...60 1 0 AF09Z-30-10-21 1SBL136001R2110 0.310 0 1 AF09Z-30-01-21 1SBL136001R2101 0.310

48...130 48...130 1 0 AF09Z-30-10-22 1SBL136001R2210 0.310 0 1 AF09Z-30-01-22 1SBL136001R2201 0.310
100...250 100...250 1 0 AF09Z-30-10-23 1SBL136001R2310 0.310 0 1 AF09Z-30-01-23 1SBL136001R2301 0.310

5.5 28 7.5 28 - 12...20 1 0 AF12Z-30-10-20 1SBL156001R2010 0.310 0 1 AF12Z-30-01-20 1SBL156001R2001 0.310

24...60 20...60 1 0 AF12Z-30-10-21 1SBL156001R2110 0.310 0 1 AF12Z-30-01-21 1SBL156001R2101 0.310

48...130 48...130 1 0 AF12Z-30-10-22 1SBL156001R2210 0.310 0 1 AF12Z-30-01-22 1SBL156001R2201 0.310
100...250 100...250 1 0 AF12Z-30-10-23 1SBL156001R2310 0.310 0 1 AF12Z-30-01-23 1SBL156001R2301 0.310

7.5 30 10 30 - 12...20 1 0 AF16Z-30-10-20 1SBL176001R2010 0.310 0 1 AF16Z-30-01-20 1SBL176001R2001 0.310

24...60 20...60 1 0 AF16Z-30-10-21 1SBL176001R2110 0.310 0 1 AF16Z-30-01-21 1SBL176001R2101 0.310

48...130 48...130 1 0 AF16Z-30-10-22 1SBL176001R2210 0.310 0 1 AF16Z-30-01-22 1SBL176001R2201 0.310
100...250 100...250 1 0 AF16Z-30-10-23 1SBL176001R2310 0.310 0 1 AF16Z-30-01-23 1SBL176001R2301 0.310
11 45 15 45 - 12...20 0 0 AF26Z-30-00-20 1SBL236001R2000 0.350

24...60 20...60 0 0 AF26Z-30-00-21 1SBL236001R2100 0.350

48...130 48...130 0 0 AF26Z-30-00-22 1SBL236001R2200 0.350 100...250 100...250 0 0 AF26Z-30-00-23 1SBL236001R2300 0.350 15 50 20 50 - 12...20 0 0 AF30Z-30-00-20 1SBL276001R2000 0.350

24...60 20...60 0 0 AF30Z-30-00-21 1SBL276001R2100 0.350

48...130 48...130 0 0 AF30Z-30-00-22 1SBL276001R2200 0.350 100...250 100...250 0 0 AF30Z-30-00-23 1SBL276001R2300 0.350

18.5 50 25 50 - 12...20 0 0 AF38Z-30-00-20 1SBL296001R2000 0.350

24...60 20...60 0 0 AF38Z-30-00-21 1SBL296001R2100 0.350

48...130 48...130 0 0 AF38Z-30-00-22 1SBL296001R2200 0.350 100...250 100...250 0 0 AF38Z-30-00-23 1SBL296001R2300 0.350 (1) For other auxiliary contacts arrangements, please contact your ABB local sales organization.

Note: Only AF..Z contactors with DC control voltage 12...20 V DC need to respect the connection polarities indicated close to the coil terminals: A1+ for the positive pole and A2- for the negative pole.

ABB | 5/85
1SBC101372S0201 - Rev. B
5

Page 1214 of 1513 ends

2 Manual motor starters
Overview
Table for short-circuit ratings for 400/415 V
Standard range Performance range
MS116 MS132, MS165, MS5100
Selection parameters
Rated operational
power
Setting range for
thermal release
Type Short-circuit
breaking capacity
Type Short-circuit
breaking capacity
I

CU ICS ICU ICS

0.03 kW1) 0.1 … 0.16 A MS116-0.16 50 kA 50 kA MS132-0.16 100 kA 100 kA

0.06 kW 0.16 … 0.25 A MS116-0.25 50 kA 50 kA MS132-0.25 100 kA 100 kA

0.09 kW 0.25 … 0.4 A MS116-0.4 50 kA 50 kA MS132-0.4 100 kA 100 kA

0.18 kW 0.4 … 0.63 A MS116-0.63 50 kA 50 kA MS132-0.63 100 kA 100 kA

0.25 kW 0.63 … 1.0 A MS116-1.0 50 kA 50 kA MS132-1.0 100 kA 100 kA

0.55 kW 1.0…1.6 A MS116-1.6 50 kA 50 kA MS132-1.6 100 kA 100 kA

0.75 kW 1.6…2.5 A MS116-2.5 50 kA 50 kA MS132-2.5 100 kA 100 kA

1.5 kW 2.5…4.0 A MS116-4.0 50 kA 50 kA MS132-4.0 100 kA 100 kA

2.2 kW 4.0…6.3 A MS116-6.3 50 kA 50 kA MS132-6.3 100 kA 100 kA

4.0 kW 6.3…10 A MS116-10 50 kA 50 kA MS132-10 100 kA 100 kA

5.5 kW 8…12 A MS116-12 25 kA 25 kA MS132-12 100 kA 100 kA

7.5 kW 10…16 A MS116-16 16 kA 16 kA MS132-16 / MS165-16 100 kA 100 kA

7.5 kW 14 ... 20 A MS165-20 100 kA 100 kA

7.5 kW 16…20 A MS116-20 15 kA 10 kA MS132-20 100 kA 100 kA 11 kW 18 … 25 A MS165-25 100 kA 100 kA
11 kW 20…25 A MS116-25 15 kA 10 kA MS132-25 50 kA 50 kA 15 kW 25…32 A MS116-32 10 kA 10 kA MS132-32 50 kA 25 kA 15 kW 23 ... 32 A MS165-32 100 kA 75 kA
22 kW 30 ... 42 A MS165-42 50 kA 25 kA
22 kW 40 ... 54 A MS165-54 50 kA 25 kA
25 kW -
30 kW 52 ... 65 A MS165-65 50 kA 25 kA
37 kW 40 ... 100 A MS5100-100 70 kA 70 kA
45 kW 40 ... 100 A MS5100-100 70 kA 70 kA
1) 690 V
Type MS116 MS132 MS165 MS5100
Thermal and electromagnetic protection Yes Yes Yes Yes
Electromagnetic protection - - - -
Phase loss sensitivity Yes Yes Yes
Switch position ON/OFF ON/OFF/TRIP ON/OFF/TRIP ON/OFF/TRIP Magnetic trip indication - Yes Yes
Lockable handle without accessories - Yes Yes Yes
Disconnecting feature Yes Yes Yes Yes
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 90 mm
Rated operational current I
e

0.16 ... 32 A 0.16 ... 32 A 16 ... 65 A 100 A
Setting range 0.1 ... 32 A 0.1 ... 32 A 10 ... 65 A 40 ... 100 A 2) Ambient air temperature -25 ... +55 °C 1) -25 ... +60 °C 1) -20 ... +60 °C 1) -25 ... +70 °C 1) Compensated
2) For motor loads only up to 80 A
Accessories
Auxiliary contact HKF1, HK1 AUX
Signalling
contact
for tripped alarm SK1 -
for short-circuit alarm - CK1 -
Shunt trip AA1 SOR-C
Undervoltage release UA1 UVR-C
2/4 | ABB

Page 1215 of 1513 ends

ABB | 2/7
2CDC131062C0201
MS132 manual motor starters

0.10 to 32 A – with thermal and electromagnetic protection Description
MS132 is a compact and powerful range for motor protection up to 15 kW (400 V) / 32 A in width of 45 mm.

This type has also a clear and reliable indication of fault in a separate window in the event of short-circuit tripping. Further features are the build-in disconnect function, temperature compensation, trip-free mechanism and a rotary handle with a clear switch position indication. The manual motor starter is suitable for three- and single-phase applications. The handle is lockable to protect against unauthorized changes. Auxiliary contacts, signaling contacts, undervoltage releases, shunt trips, power in-feed blocks are available as accessory. These are suitable throughout the MS116/MS132/MS165-range.

Ordering details
Rated
operational
power
400 V
AC-3
Setting
range
Short-circuit
breaking
capacity ICS at
400 V AC
Rated instantaneous shortcircuit current
setting li
Type Order code Weight
(1 pc)
kW A kA A kg

0.03 2) 0.10 … 0.16 100 2.00 1) MS132-0.16 1SAM350000R1001 0.215

0.06 0.16 … 0.25 100 3.10 1) MS132-0.25 1SAM350000R1002 0.215

0.09 0.25 … 0.40 100 5.00 1) MS132-0.4 1SAM350000R1003 0.215

0.18 0.40 … 0.63 100 7.90 1) MS132-0.63 1SAM350000R1004 0.215

0.25 0.63 … 1.00 100 12.5 1) MS132-1.0 1SAM350000R1005 0.215

0.55 1.00 … 1.60 100 20.0 1) MS132-1.6 1SAM350000R1006 0.265

0.75 1.60 … 2.50 100 31.3 1) MS132-2.5 1SAM350000R1007 0.265

1.50 2.50 … 4.00 100 50.0 MS132-4.0 1SAM350000R1008 0.265

2.20 4.00 … 6.30 100 78.8 MS132-6.3 1SAM350000R1009 0.265

4.00 6.30 … 10.0 100 150 MS132-10 1SAM350000R1010 0.265

5.50 8.00 … 12.0 100 180 MS132-12 1SAM350000R1012 0.310

7.50 10.0 … 16.0 100 240 MS132-16 1SAM350000R1011 0.310

7.50 16.0 … 20.0 100 300 MS132-20 1SAM350000R1013 0.310

11.0 20.0 … 25.0 50 375 MS132-25 1SAM350000R1014 0.310

15.0 25.0 … 32.0 25 480 MS132-32 1SAM350000R1015 0.310

0.03 2) 0.10 ... 0.16 100 2.00 1) MS132-0.16-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1001 0.231

0.06 0.16 ... 0.25 100 3.10 1) MS132-0.25-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1002 0.231

0.09 0.25 ... 0.40 100 5.00 1) MS132-0.4-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1003 0.231

0.18 0.40 ... 0.63 100 7.90 1) MS132-0.63-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1004 0.231

0.25 0.63 ... 1.00 100 12.5 1) MS132-1.0-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1005 0.231

0.55 1.00 ... 1.60 100 20.0 1) MS132-1.6-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1006 0.281

0.75 1.60 ... 2.50 100 31.3 1) MS132-2.5-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1007 0.281

1.50 2.50 ... 4.00 100 50.0 MS132-4.0-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1008 0.281

2.20 4.00 ... 6.30 100 78.8 MS132-6.3-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1009 0.281

4.00 6.30 ... 10.0 100 150 MS132-10.0-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1010 0.281

5.50 8.00 ... 12.0 100 180 MS132-12.0-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1012 0.326

7.50 10.0 ... 16.0 100 240 MS132-16.0-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1011 0.326

7.50 16.0 ... 20.0 100 300 MS132-20-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1013 0.326

11.0 20.0 ... 25.0 50 375 MS132-25-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1014 0.326

15.0 25.0 ... 32.0 25 480 MS132-32-HKF1-11 1SAM350005R1015 0.326 Note: Manual motor starters should always be selected so that the actual motor current is within the setting range. 1) The data is valid for products, produced after week 34, 2014. 2) 690 V
1SBC101232F0010
MS132-10
2CDC241001F0011
MS132-32
2CDC241014F0011
MS132-0.16-HKF1-11
2CDC241015F0011
MS132-32-HKF1-11
Main dimensions mm, inches 1.38" 0.1" 3.54" 2.95"

0.06" 0.22"

0.55"

1.77"

0.55"

2.85"

3.2"

1.71"

1.77"
35 1.7
90 75

1.5 5.5
14 45
14 72.4

81.25 43.5
45"
2CDC242015F0009

0.06" 0.22" 0.22"

2.84"

3.19"

0.1"

3.85"

1.77"

0.55" 0.55"

1.77"

2.95"

1.38"

1.5 5.5 43.3

72.2 81.05

1.7 97.8
45 14 14
45 75
35 2CDC242016F0009
MS132 ≤ 10 A MS132 ≥ 12 A
2

Page 1216 of 1513 ends

S1-M3-25
General Information
ExtendedProduct Type: S1-M3-25
Product ID: 1SAM201907R1103
EAN: 4013614400827
CatalogDescription: S1-M3-25 Power Infeed Block
LongDescription: S1-M3-25 3-phase power infeed block Flat, for MS116 / MS132, 25mm2, Type E Additional Information
Ambient Air Temperature: Operation -25 …. +70 °C
Storage -50 …+80 °C
Ampere RatingUL/CSA: 65 A
ConnectingCapacityMainCircuit UL/CSA: Stranded 1/2x 10 ... 4 AWG Flexible 1/2x 10 ... 6 AWG
ConnectingCapacityMainCircuit: Rigid 1x 6 ... 25 mm²
Flexible 1x 6 ... 16 mm²
CountryofOrigin: Germany (DE)
Customs Tariff Number: 85369010
Data Sheet, Technical Information: 1SBC100192C02--
Declarationof Conformity- CE: 1SAD938510-0056
Degree of Protection: IP20
DimensionDiagram: 1SAM200451F0003
E-nummer: 3112082
EAN: 4013614400827
EPLANCatalogTree: Electrical engineering / Protection devices / Motor overload switch ETIM4: EC002498 - Accessories for low-voltage switch technology ETIM5: EC002498 - Accessories for low-voltage switch technology ETIM6: EC002498 - Accessories for low-voltage switch technology GOSTCertificate: 1SAA937000-2703
IITPublishingStatus: Level 0 - Information enabled
Industrial ITCertificationLevel: 0
Instructions andManuals: 2CDC131011M6802
2CDC131034M6801
2CDC131022M6802
Invoice Description: S1-M3-25 3-phase power infeed block Flat, for MS116 / MS132, 25mm2, Type E MaximumOperatingVoltage UL/CSA: Main Circuit 600 V
MinimumOrder Quantity: 1 piece
Object ClassificationCode: X
Package Level 1 EAN: 4013614488207
Package Level 1Gross Weight: 0.45 kg
Package Level 1 Height: 38 mm
Package Level 1 Length: 245 mm
Package Level 1 Units: 10 piece
Package Level 1 Width: 59 mm
Product MainType: S1
Product Name: Power Infeed Block
Product Net Depth: 32 mm
Product Net Height: 43.95 mm
Products Low Voltage Products and Systems Control Products Manual Motor Starters Manual Motor Starters Accessories

Page 1217 of 1513 ends

Product Net Weight: 0.042 kg
Product Net Width: 43.8 mm
RatedOperationalCurrent (I ): 65 A
RatedOperational Voltage: 690 V
RecommendedScrew Driver: Pozidriv 2
M3.5
RoHSDate: 0159
RoHSInformation: 1SAA963003-4402
RoHSStatus: Following EU Directive 2002/95/EC August 18, 2005 and amendment SellingUnit of Measure: piece
Short Description: S1-M3-25 3-phase power infeed block
Standards: IEC/EN 60947-1
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
UL 60947-1
UL 60947-4-1
Suitable For: MS116
MS132
Suitable for Product Class: Manual Motor Starter
TighteningTorque: Main Circuit 2.5 N·m
TighteningTorque UL/CSA: Main Circuit 22 in·lb
ULCertificate: 1SAA963001-1602
Wire StrippingLength: Main Circuit 10 mm
cULCertificate: 1SAA963001-1701
eClass: 7.0 27379201
e

Page 1218 of 1513 ends

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 1 / 6
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Extract from the online
catalog
TRIO-PS/ 3AC/24DC/10
Order No.: 2866459
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2866459 DIN rail power supply unit, primary-switched mode, 3-phase, output:
24 V DC / 10 A
Commercial data
EAN
4 046356 046701
sales group H001
Pack 1 Pcs.

Customs tariff 85044082
Gross weight in pieces 1.4361 KG
Net weight per piece 1.4361 KG
Catalog page information Page 593 (IF-2011)
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
09/06/2006
http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.

Product description
TRIO POWER is the DIN-rail-mountable power supply unit with basic functions. With an output voltage of 5 V DC, 12 V DC, 24 V DC, and 48 V DC and 1- and 3-phase versions with 60 W or 960 W, it is particularly suited for use in series production in mechanical engineering. The wide-range input and international certification package allow worldwide implementation.

The high MTBF of 500,000 h stands for high supply reliability. The devices can be connected in parallel to increase the capacity and redundancy.

The clear LED signaling and the device connection with double terminal block for plus and minus for fast potential distribution are further advantages of this device series. A third minus terminal block simplifies the grounding on the

Page 1219 of 1513 ends

TRIO-PS/ 3AC/24DC/10 Order No.: 2866459
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2866459 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 2 / 6
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
secondary side. All power supply units are idle-proof and short-circuit-proof and provide a regulated and adjustable output voltage.

Technical data
Input data
Nominal input voltage 2x / 3x 400 V AC ... 500 V AC
AC input voltage range 3x 320 V AC ... 575 V AC (for 3-phase operation) 2x 360 V AC ... 575 V AC (for 2-phase operation)
AC frequency range 45 Hz ... 65 Hz
Current consumption Approx. 3x 0.6 A (400 V AC)
3x 0.5 A (480 V AC)
Inrush surge current < 15 A
Power failure bypass > 20 ms (400 V AC)
> 25 ms (480 V AC)
Permissible backup fuse B6
B10
B16
Required backup fuse (device and line protection) (externally via 3 circuit breakers 6 A, 10 A or 16 A, characteristic B)
Power factor (cos phi) 0.59
Type of protection Transient surge protection
Protective circuit/component Varistor
Output data
Nominal output voltage 24 V DC ±1%
Setting range of the output voltage 22.5 V DC ... 29.5 V DC (> 24 V constant capacity) Output current 10 A (-25°C ... 55°C)
Derating 55 °C ... 70 °C (2.5%/K)
Connection in parallel Yes, for redundancy and increased capacity Connection in series Yes
Max. capacitive load Unlimited
Current limitation Approx. 15 A
Control deviation < 1 % (change in load, static 10% ... 90%) < 2 % (change in load, dynamic 10% ... 90%)
< 0.1 % (change in input voltage ±10%)
Residual ripple PP
Peak switching voltages nominal load PP

Page 1220 of 1513 ends

TRIO-PS/ 3AC/24DC/10 Order No.: 2866459
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2866459 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 3 / 6
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Maximum power dissipation NO-Load 6 W
Power loss nominal load max. 28 W
General data
Width 60 mm
Height 130 mm
Depth 152.5 mm
Net weight 1.3 kg
Operating voltage display Green LED
Efficiency > 89 % (at 400 V AC and nominal values)
Insulation voltage input/output 4 kV AC (type test)
2 kV AC (routine test)
Degree of protection IP20
Protection class I, with PE connection
MTBF (IEC 61709, SN 29500) > 500000 h (nach EN 29500)
Ambient temperature (operation) -25 °C ... 70 °C (> 55° C derating) Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 85 °C Max. permissible relative humidity (operation) 95 % (at 25 °C, no condensation) Mounting position horizontal DIN rail NS 35, EN 60715
Assembly instructions Can be aligned: Horizontally 0 mm, vertically 50 mm Electromagnetic compatibility Conformance with EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2:2005
Low Voltage Directive Conformance with LV directive 2006/95/EC Standard – Electrical equipment of machines EN 60204
Standard - Electrical safety EN 60950-1/VDE 0805 (SELV) Standard – Electronic equipment for use in
electrical power installations and their assembly
into electrical power installations
EN 50178/VDE 0160 (PELV)
Standard – Safety extra-low voltage EN 60950-1 (SELV)
EN 60204 (PELV)
Standard - Safe isolation DIN VDE 0100-410
DIN VDE 0106-1010
Standard – Protection against electric shock DIN 57100-410 Standard – Protection against shock currents,
basic requirements for protective separation in
electrical equipment
DIN VDE 0106-101
Standard – Limitation of mains harmonic currents EN 61000-3-2

Page 1221 of 1513 ends

TRIO-PS/ 3AC/24DC/10 Order No.: 2866459
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2866459 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 4 / 6
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
UL approvals UL/C-UL listed UL 508
UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60950
Surge voltage category III
Connection data, input
Connection method Screw connection
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded min. 0.2 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. 24
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max 14
Stripping length 9 mm
Screw thread M2,5
Connection data, output
Connection method Screw connection
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded min. 0.2 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. 16
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max 12
Stripping length 9 mm
Signaling
Status display "DC OK" LED green
Note on status display UOUT > 21.5 V: LED lights up
Certificates / Approvals
Certification cULus Listed, cULus Recognized
Certifications applied for:

Certification Ex:

Page 1222 of 1513 ends

TRIO-PS/ 3AC/24DC/10 Order No.: 2866459
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2866459 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 5 / 6
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Drawings
Block diagram
Dimensioned drawing

Page 1223 of 1513 ends

750-600
Subject to design changes WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG Postfach 2880 •D-32385 Minden Tel.: +49(0)571/887-0 E-Mail: [email protected]

10.09.2008 Hansastr. 27 •D-32423 Minden Fax: +49(0)571/887-169 www.wago.com End Module
C
D B
A
750-600
After the fieldbus node is assembled with the correct buscoupler and selected I/O modules, the end module is snapped onto the assembly.

It completes the internal data circuit and ensures correct data flow.

Description Item no. Pack.
unit
End Module 750-600 101)
End Module/T 750-600/025-000 1
(Operating temperature -20 °C ... +60 °C)
1) Also available individually
Accessories Item no. Pack.
unit
Miniature WSB quick marking system,
plain 248-501 5
with marking see pages 256 ... 257
Approvals
Series 750
Conformity marking 1
r UL 508
4 r ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 Class I, Div. 2, Grp. ABCD, T4
4 EN 60079-15 I M2 / II 3 GD Ex nA IIC T4
Marine applications see "Approvals Overview" in section 1 Technical Data
Width 12 mm
Weight 33.5 g
EMC 1-Immunity to interference acc. to EN 50082-2 (1996) EMC 1-Emission of interference acc. to EN 50081-1 (1993) EMC marine applications -
Immunity to interference acc. to Germanischer Lloyd (2003) EMC marine applications -
Emission of interference acc. to Germanischer Lloyd (2003)

Page 1224 of 1513 ends

750-652
1 28I/O-SYSTEM
Serial Interface RS-232 / RS-485
Configurable
Delivered without miniature WSB markers
D0 D1
13 14
750-652
D2 D3
MM
S S
TxD (RS-232)
Y (RS-485/422)
RS ... enabled
Flow control enabled
User LED 1
User LED 0
Data contacts
Function
Transmission status
Reception status
Error (buffer full)
RTS (RS-232)
Z (RS-485/422)
CTS (RS-232)
B (RS-485/422)
Power jumper contacts
Common
(ground)
RxD (RS-232)
A (RS-485/422)
Common
(ground)
Shield
(screen)
Shield
(screen)
RTS/Z TxD/Y
RxD/A

CTS/B RTS/Z
TxD/Y
4 x 270 pF
10 nF
1 MΩ
RxD/A
CTS/B
24 V
0 V
750-652
Shield
(screen)
Shield
(screen)
Logic
Reception Transmission
Operating mode
(RS-232/-485)
Flow control
Function
Common
(ground) Common
(ground)
The serial interface module connects RS-485/422 or RS-232 interface devices to the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750. It also provides gateways between the serial interface and the fieldbus systems supported by the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750.

No higher protocol level is required by the module. Communication is completely transparent to the fieldbus master, which provides a wide range of applications for the serial interface module. If required, communication protocols can be configured via fieldbus master.

The 2560-byte input buffer provides for high data transmission rates. At lower transmission rates, the data received in lower priority tasks is evaluated without data loss.

The 512-byte output buffer provides fast transmission of larger data strings.

The module can be configured via WAGO-I/O-CHECK or GSD files. Flexible baud rate and data width selection enable easy adaptation to applications.

Compatibility with couplers/controllers:

See manual, Section 3 "Device Description"
Description Item No. Pack.

Unit
RS-232 / RS-485 configurable 750-652 1
RS-232 / RS-485 configurable/T 750-652/025-000 1
(Operating temperature -20 °C ... +60 °C)
Accessories Item No. Pack.

Unit
WAGO-I/O-CHECK, RS-232 kit 759-302 1
Miniature WSB Quick marking system
plain 248-501 5
with marking see Full Line Catalog 2010/2011
Volume 3, Section 1
Approvals
750 Series
Conformity marking 1
r UL 508
Technical Data
Transmission channels 1 TxD / 1 RxD, full duplex, half duplex 7 or 8 bit data, 1 or 2 stop bit
Baud rate 9,600 baud (default setting)
300 baud ... 115,200 baud
Bit transfer RS-485/-422: ISO 8482 / DIN 66259 - 4;
RS-232: EIA/TIA-232-F
Line length RS-485/-422: max. approx. 1000 m
twisted pair, RS-232: max. 40 m
Buffer 2560 bytes in / 512 bytes out
Current consumption (internal) 85 mA
Voltage supply via system voltage DC/DC
Isolation 500 V system/supply
Internal bit width 1 x 46/1 x 24/1 x 6 bytes in/out
(parametrizable), 2 bytes control/status
Wire connection CAGE CLAMP®
Cross sections 0.08 mm² ... 2.5 mm² / AWG 28 ... 14
Stripped lengths 8 ... 9 mm / 0.33 in
Width 12 mm
Weight 50 g
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
Subject to design changes 05.04.2011

Postfach 2880 - D-32385 Minden
Hansastr. 27 - D-32423 Minden
Phone: +49(0)571/887-0 E-Mail: [email protected]
Fax: +49(0)571/887-169 www.wago.com

Page 1225 of 1513 ends

750-652
1 28I/O-SYSTEM
Serial Interface RS-232 / RS-485
Configurable
Delivered without miniature WSB markers
D0 D1
13 14
750-652
D2 D3
MM
S S
TxD (RS-232)
Y (RS-485/422)
RS ... enabled
Flow control enabled
User LED 1
User LED 0
Data contacts
Function
Transmission status
Reception status
Error (buffer full)
RTS (RS-232)
Z (RS-485/422)
CTS (RS-232)
B (RS-485/422)
Power jumper contacts
Common
(ground)
RxD (RS-232)
A (RS-485/422)
Common
(ground)
Shield
(screen)
Shield
(screen)
RTS/Z TxD/Y
RxD/A

CTS/B RTS/Z
TxD/Y
4 x 270 pF
10 nF
1 MΩ
RxD/A
CTS/B
24 V
0 V
750-652
Shield
(screen)
Shield
(screen)
Logic
Reception Transmission
Operating mode
(RS-232/-485)
Flow control
Function
Common
(ground) Common
(ground)
The serial interface module connects RS-485/422 or RS-232 interface devices to the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750. It also provides gateways between the serial interface and the fieldbus systems supported by the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750.

No higher protocol level is required by the module. Communication is completely transparent to the fieldbus master, which provides a wide range of applications for the serial interface module. If required, communication protocols can be configured via fieldbus master.

The 2560-byte input buffer provides for high data transmission rates. At lower transmission rates, the data received in lower priority tasks is evaluated without data loss.

The 512-byte output buffer provides fast transmission of larger data strings.

The module can be configured via WAGO-I/O-CHECK or GSD files. Flexible baud rate and data width selection enable easy adaptation to applications.

Compatibility with couplers/controllers:

See manual, Section 3 "Device Description"
Description Item No. Pack.

Unit
RS-232 / RS-485 configurable 750-652 1
RS-232 / RS-485 configurable/T 750-652/025-000 1
(Operating temperature -20 °C ... +60 °C)
Accessories Item No. Pack.

Unit
WAGO-I/O-CHECK, RS-232 kit 759-302 1
Miniature WSB Quick marking system
plain 248-501 5
with marking see Full Line Catalog 2010/2011
Volume 3, Section 1
Approvals
750 Series
Conformity marking 1
r UL 508
Technical Data
Transmission channels 1 TxD / 1 RxD, full duplex, half duplex 7 or 8 bit data, 1 or 2 stop bit
Baud rate 9,600 baud (default setting)
300 baud ... 115,200 baud
Bit transfer RS-485/-422: ISO 8482 / DIN 66259 - 4;
RS-232: EIA/TIA-232-F
Line length RS-485/-422: max. approx. 1000 m
twisted pair, RS-232: max. 40 m
Buffer 2560 bytes in / 512 bytes out
Current consumption (internal) 85 mA
Voltage supply via system voltage DC/DC
Isolation 500 V system/supply
Internal bit width 1 x 46/1 x 24/1 x 6 bytes in/out
(parametrizable), 2 bytes control/status
Wire connection CAGE CLAMP®
Cross sections 0.08 mm² ... 2.5 mm² / AWG 28 ... 14
Stripped lengths 8 ... 9 mm / 0.33 in
Width 12 mm
Weight 50 g
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
Subject to design changes 05.04.2011

Postfach 2880 - D-32385 Minden
Hansastr. 27 - D-32423 Minden
Phone: +49(0)571/887-0 E-Mail: [email protected]
Fax: +49(0)571/887-169 www.wago.com

Page 1226 of 1513 ends

750-430, 750-431 / 753-430, 753-431
Subject to design changes WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG Postfach 2880 •D-32385 Minden Tel.: +49(0)571/887-0 E-Mail: [email protected]

10.09.2008 Hansastr. 27 •D-32423 Minden Fax: +49(0)571/887-169 www.wago.com 8-Channel Digital Input Module DC 24 V
1-conductor connection; high-side switching
Fig. Series 750 / Technical data see page 28 / Delivery without Mini WSB marker Series 750 / 753 marking see pages 16 ... 17 / 18 ... 19 NOTE: Connection point marking (i.e., 1 ... 8) does not refer to channel assignment DI 2
Data contacts
DI 4
DI 8
DI 1 ... DI 8
Status
DI 1
DI 7
DI 6
Power jumper contacts
DI 3
DI 5
E1 E2
13 14
750-430
E3 E4
E5 E6
E7 E8
DI 1 DI 2
DI 7
DI
DI 8
DI
0 V
24 V
24 V
0 V
10nF
10nF
DI 3 DI 4
DI 5 DI 6
750-430
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
The digital input modules provide 8 channels maintaining a width of only 12 mm. They receive control signals from digital field devices (sensors, etc.).

Each input module has a noise-rejection filter. This filter is available with different time constants.

An optocoupler is used for electrical isolation between the bus and the field side.

Description Item no. Pack.
unit
8DI 24V DC, 3.0ms 750-430 101)
8DI 24V DC, 0.2ms 750-431 101)
8DI 24V DC, 3.0ms 750-430/025-000 1
(Operating temperature -20 °C ... +60 °C)
8DI 24V DC, 3.0ms (without connector) 753-430 101)
8DI 24V DC, 0.2ms (without connector) 753-431 101)
1) Also available individually
Accessories Item no. Pack.
unit
753 Series connector 753-110 25
Coding elements 753-150 100
Miniature WSB quick marking system,
plain 248-501 5
with marking see pages 256 ... 257
Approvals
Series 750 and 753
r UL 508
Conformity marking 1
4 r ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 Class I, Div. 2, Grp. ABCD, T4
Series 750
4 EN 60079-15 I M2 / II 3 GD Ex nA IIC T4
BR-Ex nA II T4
Marine applications see "Approvals Overview" in section 1 Technical Data
No. of inputs 8
Current consumption (internal) 17 mA
Voltage via power jumper contacts DC 24 V (-25 % ... +30 %) Signal voltage (0) DC -3 V ... +5 V
Signal voltage (1) DC 15 V ... 30 V
Input filter 3.0 ms (750-430 / 753-430)

0.2 ms (750-431 / 753-431)
Input current (typ.) 2.8 mA
Isolation 500 V system/supply
Internal bit width 8 bits
Wire connection CAGE CLAMP®
Cross sections 0.08 mm² ... 2.5 mm² / AWG 28 ... 14
Stripped lengths (750 / 753 Series) 8 ... 9 mm / 0.33 in 9 ... 10 mm / 0.37 in
Width 12 mm
Weight 48.5 g
EMC 1-Immunity to interference acc. to EN 50082-2 (1996) EMC 1-Emission of interference acc. to EN 50081-1 (1993) EMC marine applications -
Immunity to interference acc. to Germanischer Lloyd (2003) EMC marine applications -
Emission of interference acc. to Germanischer Lloyd (2003)

Page 1227 of 1513 ends

750-512 / 753-512
Subject to design changes WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG Postfach 2880 •D-32385 Minden Tel.: +49(0)571/887-0 E-Mail: [email protected]

10.09.2008 Hansastr. 27 •D-32423 Minden Fax: +49(0)571/887-169 www.wago.com 2-Channel Relay Output Module AC 230 V, DC 30 V
non-floating; 2 make contacts
Fig. Series 750 / Technical data see page 28 / Delivery without Mini WSB marker Series 750 / 753 marking see pages 16 ... 17 / 18 ... 19 DO 2
Data contacts
relay 1 relay 2
Status
DO 1
Status
Power jumper contacts
N
DC 30 V
AC 230 V
13 14
13 14
C
D B
A
L L
0V 0V
750-512
DO 1
N
DC 30 V
Status
DO
N
DO 2
AC 230 V DC 30 V
AC 230 V
750-512
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
The connected load is switched via the digital output (relay contacts) from the control system.

The internal system voltage is used to trigger the relays.

Note that the power jumper contacts supply both “N” (common point) and switched output voltages (this may be DC or AC).

The switched status of the relay is shown by a LED.

The module is a 2-channel, 4-conductor device and actuators with a ground (earth) wire may be directly connected to the module.

Notice:

An additional supply module must be added for operation with AC 250 V/ DC 30 V!
Description Item no. Pack.
unit
2DO 230V AC 2.0A/ Relay 2NO 750-512 101)
2DO 230V AC 2.0A/ Relay 2NO (without
connector)
753-512 101)
1) Also available individually
Accessories Item no. Pack.
unit
753 Series connector 753-110 25
Coding elements 753-150 100
Miniature WSB quick marking system,
plain 248-501 5
with marking see pages 256 ... 257
Approvals
Series 750 and 753
Conformity marking 1
r UL 508
4 r ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 Class I, Div. 2, Grp. ABCD, T4
Series 750
4 EN 60079-15 I M2 / II 3 GD Ex nC IIC T4
Marine applications see "Approvals Overview" in section 1 Technical Data
No. of outputs 2 make contacts
Current consumption max. (internal) 100 mA
Switching voltage (max.) AC 250 V / DC 30 V
Switching power 500 VA / 60 W (resistive load)
cos ϕ max. =0.4; L/R max = 7 ms
Switching current (min.) 10 mA / 5 V DC
Switching current (max.) AC / DC 2 A
Switching rate (max.) 30 / min (at nominal load)
Pull-in time (max.) 10 ms
Bounce time (typ.) 1.2 ms
Drop-out time (max.) 10 ms
Contact material Silver alloy
Mechanical life 2 x 107 switching operations
Electrical life 3 x 105 switching operations
(AC 2 A / 250 V) or (DC 2 A / 30 V)
Isolation 1.5 kV eff. (field/system)*;
* 2.5 kV rated surge voltage;
Overvoltage category III
Internal bit width 2 bits
Wire connection CAGE CLAMP®
Cross sections 0.08 mm² ... 2.5 mm² / AWG 28 ... 14
Stripped lengths (750 / 753 Series) 8 ... 9 mm / 0.33 in 9 ... 10 mm / 0.37 in
Width 12 mm
Weight 54.5 g
EMC 1-Immunity to interference acc. to EN 50082-2 (1996) EMC 1-Emission of interference acc. to EN 50081-1 (1993) EMC marine applications -
Immunity to interference acc. to Germanischer Lloyd (2003) EMC marine applications -
Emission of interference acc. to Germanischer Lloyd (2003)

Page 1228 of 1513 ends

750-842
3 90
PLC - ETHERNET TCP/IP Programmable Fieldbus Controller
16-bit CPU
Data contacts
Fieldbus
connection
RJ-45
Power jumper contacts
0 V
Supply via
power jumper contacts
24 V
Supply
24 V
0 V
Status
voltage supply
-System
-Power jumper contacts
Configuration
and programming
interface
24V 0V
+ +
— —
01 02
ON
LINK
TxD/RxD
I/O

ETHERNET
C
D B
A
ERROR
USR
W
750-842
The ETHERNET PLC combines control functionality,
I/O interface and ETHERNET in one device.

Programming PLC applications is performed in compliance with IEC 61131-3.

Function blocks allow both clients and servers to be programmed via socket APIs for all transport protocols (e.g., TCP, UDP).

Features and applications:
• Use of decentralized control can better support a PLC or PC • Complex applications can be divided into individually testable units • Programmable fault response in the event of a fieldbus failure • Signal pre-processing reduces fieldbus transmissions
• Peripheral equipment can be controlled directly, resulting in faster system response times
• Stand-alone, compact controller
Description Item No. Pack.

Unit
ETHERNET Controller 10 MBit 750-842 1
Accessories Item No. Pack.

Unit
WAGO-I/O-PRO V2.3, RS-232 kit 759-333 1
Miniature WSB Quick marking system
plain 248-501 5
with marking see Section 11
Approvals
Conformity marking 1
Korea Certification
Marine applications ABS, BV, DNV, GL, KR, LR, NKK, PRS, RINA r UL 508
r ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 Class I, Div. 2, Grp. ABCD, T4
TÜV 12.1297 X (Brazil) Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
4 TÜV 07 ATEX 554086 X I M2 Ex d I Mb,
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc,
II 3 D Ex tc IIIC T135°C Dc
IECEx TUN 09.0001 X Ex d I Mb,
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc,
Ex tc IIIC T135°C Dc
System Data
No. of controllers connected to Master limited by ETHERNET specification Transmission medium Twisted Pair S-UTP 100 Ω cat. 5
Max. length of fieldbus segment 100 m between hub station and 750-842; max. length of network limited by
ETHERNET specification
Baud rate 10 Mbit/s
Buscoupler connection RJ-45
Protocols MODBUS/TCP, HTTP, BootP,

MODBUS/UDP
Programming WAGO-I/O-PRO 32, from firmware version
SW 15, also programmable with WAGOI/O-PRO V2.3
IEC 61131-3 IL, LD, FBD (CFC), ST, FC
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
Subject to design changes 26.01.2016
Postfach 2880 - D-32385 Minden
Hansastr. 27 - D-32423 Minden
Tel.: +49(0)571/887-0 E-Mail: [email protected]
Fax: +49(0)571/887-169 www.wago.com Page 1229 of 1513
3 91

3.2 1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 DC
DC
24 V
10 nF
24 V
10 nF
0 V
24 V /0 V
24 V
0 V
0 V
750-842

ELECTRONICS
I/O
modules

ELECTRONICSFIELDBUS I NTERFACE

FIELDBUS

INTERFACE
Technical Data
Number of I/O modules 64
Max. input process image 512 bytes
Max. output process image 512 bytes
Max. input variables 512 bytes
Max. output variables 512 bytes
Configuration automatic
Program memory 128 Kbytes
Data memory 64 Kbytes
Non-volatile memory (retain) 8 Kbytes
Cycle time < 3ms for 1,000 statements /
256 dig. I/Os
Power supply 24 V DC (-25 % ... +30 %)
Max. input current (24 V) 500 mA
Power supply efficiency 87 %
Internal current consumption (5 V) 200 mA
Total current for I/O modules (5 V) 1800 mA
Isolation 500V system/supply
Voltage via power jumper contacts 24 V DC (-25 % ... +30 %) Current via power jumper contacts (max.) 10 A DC
General Specifications
Operating temperature 0 °C ... +55 °C
Wire connection CAGE CLAMP®
Cross sections 0.08 mm² ... 2.5 mm² / AWG 28 ... 14
Strip lengths 8 ... 9 mm / 0.33 in
Dimensions (mm) W x H x L 51 x 65 x 100
Height from upper-edge of DIN 35 rail
Weight 197 g
Storage temperature -25 °C ... +85 °C
Relative air humidity (no condensation) 95 %
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Degree of protection IP20
EMC immunity of interference acc. to EN 61000-6-2, marine applications EMC emission of interference acc. to EN 61000-6-4, marine applications

Page 1230 of 1513 ends
Page 1231 of 1513 ends
Page 1232 of 1513 ends

System pro M compact®
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
for branch circuit protection acc. to UL 489
The miniature circuit breaker SU 200 M
is ABB’s solution for UL 489 branch circuit
protection up to 480 Y/277 V AC and
96 V DC. This circuit breaker is an allround device for AC and DC applications for universal use in North American and
global markets due to its approvals acc.
to the international standards UL, CSA
and IEC. Moreover, SU 200 M is fully
compatible with System pro M compact®
UL 489 accessories.

Features
− High performance MCB with 10 kA interrupting capacity acc. to UL 489 / CSA 22.2 No. 5 and 15 kA breaking capacity
acc. to IEC/EN 60947-2
− Certified up to In
= 40 A at 480 Y/277 V AC acc. to UL 489 /
CSA 22.2 No. 5
− Certified for AC and DC use acc. to UL and CSA
− 40 °C reference temperature acc. to UL and CSA
− Current limiting acc. to UL 489
− Clear contact position indication in red/green (”real CPI“) 2CDC021004S0014
Standards
UL 489
CSA 22.2 No. 5
IEC/EN 60947-2
Approvals
UL 489 US
CSA 22.2 No. 5 CA
VDE DE
CCC CN
Standards and approvals
2CDC021046S0014

Page 1233 of 1513 ends

2 1SXP403001B0201
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
Technical data
General Data
Standards UL 489, CSA 22.2 No. 5, IEC/EN 60947-2
Poles 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P
Tripping characteristics C, K, Z
Rated current In

0.2 - 63 A
Rated frequency f 50 / 60 Hz, DC (0 Hz)
Rated insulation voltage Ui acc. to IEC/EN 60664-1 250 V AC (phase to ground), 440 V AC (phase to phase) Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 3
IEC/EN 60947-2
Rated operational voltage Ue
1P: 230 V AC; 2P, 3P, 4P: 400 V AC
Max. power frequency recovery voltage Umax AC 1P: 253 V AC; 2P, 3P, 4P: 440 V AC Min. operating voltage 12 V AC, 12 V DC
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu 15 kA Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics ≤ 40 A: 11.25 kA > 40 A: 7.5 kA
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (1.2/50μs) 4 kV (test voltage 6.2 kV at sea level, 5 kV at 2,000 m) Dielectric test voltage 2 kV (50 / 60Hz, 1 min.)
Reference temperature for tripping characteristics 30 °C Electrical endurance In
< 30 A: 20,000 ops (AC), In ≥ 30 A: 10,000 ops. (AC);
1 cycle (2 s - ON, 13 s - OFF, In
≤ 32 A), 1 cycle (2 s - ON, 28 s - OFF, In > 32 A)

UL / CSA
Rated voltage AC
AC
AC
AC
DC
1P: 277 V AC up to 40 A for C, Z char.,
277 V AC up to 35 A for K char., 240 V AC
2P, 3P, 4P: 480 Y / 277 V AC up to 40 A for C, Z char., 480 Y / 277 V AC up to 35 A for K char., 240 V AC
1P: 48 V DC; 2P: 96 V DC (2p in series)
Rated interrupting capacity acc. to UL 1077 –
Short-circuit current rating acc. to UL 489 10 kA
Application –
Reference temperature for tripping characteristics 40 °C Electrical endurance 6,000 ops (AC), 6,000 ops. (DC); 1 cycle (1 s - ON, 9 s - OFF) Mechanical data
Housing Insulation group II, RAL 7035
Toggle Insulation group II, black, sealable
Contact position indication Real CPI (green OFF / red ON) Protection degree acc. to DIN EN 60529 IP20*, IP40 in enclosure with cover Mechanical endurance 20,000 ops.

Shock resistance acc. to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 25 g - 2 shocks - 13 ms Vibration resistance acc. to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 5g - 20 cycles at 5…150…5 Hz with load 0.8 In Environmental conditions (damp heat cyclic) acc. to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 28 cycles with 55°C/90-96% and 25°C/95-100% Ambient temperature -25 … +55°C
Storage temperature -40 ... +70 °C
Installation
Terminal Failsafe bi-directional cylinder-lift terminal Cross-section of conductors (top/bottom) solid, stranded: 35 mm² / 35 mm² flexible: 25 mm2 / 25 mm2
18 – 4 AWG
Cross-section of busbars (top/bottom) 10 mm² / 10 mm²
18 – 8 AWG
Torque 2.8 Nm
AWG 18-16: 13.3 in-lbs.

AWG 14-10: 17.7 in-lbs.

AWG 8-4: 39.8 in-lbs.

Screwdriver No. 2 Pozidrive
Mounting On DIN rail 35 mm acc. to EN 60715 by fast clip Mounting position any
Supply optional
Dimensions and weight
Mounting dimensions acc. to DIN 43880 Mounting dimension 3 Pole dimensions (H x D x W) 111 x 69 x 17.5 mm
Pole weight approx. 125 g
Combination with auxiliary elements
Auxiliary contact Yes
Signal contact Yes
Shunt trip Yes

Page 1234 of 1513 ends

1SXP403001B0201 3
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
Tripping characteristics
Tripping characteristics
Acc. to Tripping
characteristics
Rated
current
Thermal release 1) Electromagnetic release 2)
I
n
Currents:
conventional
non-tripping
current
I
1 conventional
tripping
current
I
2 Tripping
time
Range of
instantaneous
tripping
Tripping time
IEC/EN 60947-2 C 0.5 to 63 A 1.05 · In

1.3 · In
> 1 h
< 1 h 3)
5 · In
10 · In
> 0.2 s
< 0.2 s
K 0.2 to 63 A 1.05 · In

1.3 · In
> 1 h
< 1 h 3)
10 · In
14 · In
> 0.2 s
< 0.2 s
Z 0.5 to 63 A 1.05 · In

1.3 · In
> 1 h
< 1 h 3)
2 · In
3 · In
> 0.2 s
< 0.2 s
1) The thermal releases are calibrated to a nominal reference ambient temperature of 30 °C.

In the case of higher ambient temperatures, the current values fall by approx. 6 % for each 10 K temperature rise. 2) The indicated tripping values of electromagnetic tripping devices apply to a frequency of 50/60 Hz. The thermal release operates independent of frequency. 3) As from operating temperature (after I1 > 1h)
C characteristic
2CDC022002F0214

Page 1235 of 1513 ends

4 1SXP403001B0201
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
Tripping characteristics
K characteristic Z characteristic 2CDC022004F0214
2CDC022005F0214

Page 1236 of 1513 ends

8 1SXP403001B0201
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
Current limiting – Ipeak and I2t values acc. to UL 489
Type Voltage Current
A
Power Factor Phase I
peak
kA
I
2t
kA2S
SU203M-K0.2 480Y/277 10000 0.45-0.5 3 0.026 0.008
SU203M-K7 480Y/277 4095 0.45-0.5 3 2.3 11.9
SU203M-K7 480Y/277 7500 0.45-0.5 3 3.4 16.7
SU203M-K7 480Y/277 10000 0.45-0.5 3 4.6 19.0
SU203M-K20 480Y/277 4095 0.45-0.5 3 2.9 18.1
SU203M-K20 480Y/277 7500 0.45-0.5 3 4.3 28.1
SU203M-K20 480Y/277 10000 0.45-0.5 3 6.4 34.6
SU203M-K35 480Y/277 4095 0.45-0.5 3 3.4 27.9
SU203M-K35 480Y/277 7500 0.45-0.5 3 4.7 33.1
SU203M-K35 480Y/277 10000 0.45-0.5 3 9.0 72.0
SU203M-C40 480Y/277 4095 0.45-0.5 3 3.4 22.8
SU203M-C40 480Y/277 7500 0.45-0.5 3 5.1 42.5
SU203M-C40 480Y/277 10000 0.45-0.5 3 9.3 74.6
SU201M-K0.2 277 10000 0.45-0.5 1 0.7 0.092
SU201M-K7 277 4095 0.45-0.5 1 2.5 10.5
SU201M-K7 277 7500 0.45-0.5 1 3.4 16.9
SU201M-K7 277 10000 0.45-0.5 1 3.4 14.5
SU201M-K20 277 4095 0.45-0.5 1 2.8 14.7
SU201M-K20 277 7500 0.45-0.5 1 4.1 23.5
SU201M-K20 277 10000 0.45-0.5 1 4.7 32.5
SU201M-K35 277 4095 0.45-0.5 1 3.0 19.8
SU201M-K35 277 7500 0.45-0.5 1 4.7 36.5
SU201M-K35 277 10000 0.45-0.5 1 4.4 22.1
SU201M-C40 277 4095 0.45-0.5 1 3.6 22.9
SU201M-C40 277 7500 0.45-0.5 1 5.3 52.6
SU201M-C40 277 10000 0.45-0.5 1 5.9 44.9
SU203M-K63 240 4095 0.45-0.5 3 3.6 19.9
SU203M-K63 240 7500 0.45-0.5 3 5.1 33.0
SU203M-K63 240 10000 0.45-0.5 3 6.3 43.3
SU201M-K63 240 4095 0.45-0.5 1 3.9 33.8
SU201M-K63 240 7500 0.45-0.5 1 5.2 43.8
SU201M-K63 240 10000 0.45-0.5 1 6.5 61.8

Page 1237 of 1513 ends

1SXP403001B0201 9
Miniature Circuit Breaker SU200M
Accessories and dimensional drawing
Accessory overview
2CDC092011F0014
The certification of the Accessories has been done with one accessory only.

The number of electrical operations is limited to 4,000 operations for the maximum combinations and the combinations including shunt trips.

H Auxiliary contact S2C-H6RU
(change-over contact)
S/H Signal contact S2C-S6RU
ST Shunt trip S2C-A...U 2CDC022007F0014
Dimensional drawing
SU 200 M

Page 1238 of 1513 ends

Data sheet
Pluggable interface relays CR-M
Miniature relays
Pluggable interface relays are used for electrical
isolation, amplification and signal matching
between the electronic controlling, e.g. PLC
(programmable logic controller), PC or field bus
systems and the sensor / actuator level. They
don’t use additional internal protective circuits
and thus are overload-proof against short-time
variations like current or voltage peaks.

Characteristics
– Standard miniature relays with mechanical status indication – 13 different rated control supply voltages:

DC versions: 12 V, 24 V, 48 V, 60 V, 110 V, 125 V, 220 V AC versions: 24 V, 48 V, 60 V, 110 V, 120 V, 230 V
– Output: 2 c/o (SPDT) contacts (12 A), 3 c/o (SPDT)
contacts (10 A) or 4 c/o (SPDT) contacts (6 A)
– Available with or without LED
– 4 c/o (SPDT) contact version optionally equipped with gold contacts, LED and free wheeling diode
– Integrated test button for manual actuation and locking of output contacts (DC coil = blue, AC coil = orange) that can be removed if necessary
– Cadmium-free contact material
– Suited for logical and standard sockets
– Width on socket: 27 mm (1.063 in)
– Pluggable function modules: reverse polarity protection/ free wheeling diode, LED indication, RC elements,
overvoltage protection
Approvals
H ANSI/UL 508, CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14
F CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14
J VDE (except 125 V DC devices)
R EAC
P Lloyds Register (only devices with 4 c/o (SPDT)
contacts)
E CCC
L RMRS (except 60 V and 125 V devices)
Marks
a CE
2CDC 291 002 S0015

Page 1239 of 1513 ends

Data sheet | Pluggable interface relays CR-M - 3
Interface relays with LED, 2 c/o (SPDT) contacts: 250 V, 12 A Type Rated control supply voltage Us Order code
CR-M012DC2L 12 V DC 1SVR 405 611 R4100
CR-M024DC2L 24 V DC 1SVR 405 611 R1100
CR-M048DC2L 48 V DC 1SVR 405 611 R6100
CR-M060DC2L 60 V DC 1SVR 405 611 R4300
CR-M110DC2L 110 V DC 1SVR 405 611 R8100
CR-M125DC2L 125 V DC 1SVR 405 611 R8300
CR-M220DC2L 220 V DC 1SVR 405 611 R9100
CR-M024AC2L 24 V AC 1SVR 405 611 R0100
CR-M048AC2L 48 V AC 1SVR 405 611 R5100
CR-M110AC2L 110 V AC 1SVR 405 611 R7100
CR-M120AC2L 120 V AC 1SVR 405 611 R2100
CR-M230AC2L 230 V AC 1SVR 405 611 R3100
Interface relays with LED, 3 c/o (SPDT) contacts: 250 V, 10 A CR-M012DC3L 12 V DC 1SVR 405 612 R4100
CR-M024DC3L 24 V DC 1SVR 405 612 R1100
CR-M048DC3L 48 V DC 1SVR 405 612 R6100
CR-M060DC3L 60 V DC 1SVR 405 612 R4300
CR-M110DC3L 110 V DC 1SVR 405 612 R8100
CR-M125DC3L 125 V DC 1SVR 405 612 R8300
CR-M220DC3L 220 V DC 1SVR 405 612 R9100
CR-M024AC3L 24 V AC 1SVR 405 612 R0100
CR-M048AC3L 48 V AC 1SVR 405 612 R5100
CR-M110AC3L 110 V AC 1SVR 405 612 R7100
CR-M120AC3L 120 V AC 1SVR 405 612 R2100
CR-M230AC3L 230 V AC 1SVR 405 612 R3100
Interface relays with LED, 4 c/o (SPDT) contacts: 250 V, 6 A CR-M012DC4L 12 V DC 1SVR 405 613 R4100
CR-M024DC4L 24 V DC 1SVR 405 613 R1100
CR-M048DC4L 48 V DC 1SVR 405 613 R6100
CR-M060DC4L 60 V DC 1SVR 405 613 R4300
CR-M110DC4L 110 V DC 1SVR 405 613 R8100
CR-M125DC4L 125 V DC 1SVR 405 613 R8300
CR-M220DC4L 220 V DC 1SVR 405 613 R9100
CR-M024AC4L 24 V AC 1SVR 405 613 R0100
CR-M048AC4L 48 V AC 1SVR 405 613 R5100
CR-M110AC4L 110 V AC 1SVR 405 613 R7100
CR-M120AC4L 120 V AC 1SVR 405 613 R2100
CR-M230AC4L 230 V AC 1SVR 405 613 R3100
Interface relays with LED and free wheeling diode, 4 c/o (SPDT) contacts: 250 V, 6 A CR-M024DC4LD 24 V DC 1SVR 405 614 R1100
Interface relays with gold contacts, 4 c/o (SPDT) contacts: 250 V, 6 A CR-M024DC4G 24 V DC 1SVR 405 618 R1000
CR-M024AC4G 24 V AC 1SVR 405 618 R0000
CR-M110AC4G 110 V AC 1SVR 405 618 R7000
CR-M230AC4G 230 V AC 1SVR 405 618 R3000

Page 1240 of 1513 ends

Data sheet | Pluggable interface relays CR-M - 5
Varistor and LED - Overvoltage protection
CR-P/M 62C 6-24 V AC/DC red, for DC: A1+, A2- 1SVR 405 655 R0000 CR-P/M 62CV 6-24 V AC/DC green, for DC: A1+, A2- 1SVR 405 655 R1000 CR-P/M 62D 24-60 V AC/DC red, for DC: A1+, A2- 1SVR 405 655 R4000 CR-P/M 62DV 24-60 V AC/DC green, for DC: A1+, A2- 1SVR 405 655 R4100 CR-P/M 92C 110-230 V AC / 110 V DC red, for DC: A1+, A2- 1SVR 405 655 R0100 CR-P/M 92CV 110-230 V AC / 110 V DC green, for DC: A1+, A2- 1SVR 405 655 R1100 Varistor - Overvoltage protection
CR-P/M 72 24 V AC 1SVR 405 656 R0000
CR-P/M 72A 115 V AC 1SVR 405 656 R1000
CR-P/M 82 230 V AC 1SVR 405 656 R2000
Plug to replace the test button (Packing unit = 100 pieces) CR-MP 1SVR 405 658 R2000
Sockets
Type Version Connection Order code
Logical sockets
CR-M2LS for 2 c/o (SPDT) contacts screw 1SVR 405 651 R1100 CR-M3LS for 3 c/o (SPDT) contacts screw 1SVR 405 651 R2100 CR-M4LS for 2 or 4 c/o (SPDT) contacts screw 1SVR 405 651 R3100 CR-M2LC for 2 c/o (SPDT) contacts spring 1SVR 405 651 R1200 CR-M4LC for 2 or 4 c/o (SPDT) contacts spring 1SVR 405 651 R3200 Standard sockets
CR-M2SS for 2 c/o (SPDT) contacts screw 1SVR 405 651 R1000 CR-M3SS for 3 c/o (SPDT) contacts screw 1SVR 405 651 R2000 CR-M4SS for 2 or 4 c/o (SPDT) contacts screw 1SVR 405 651 R3000 CR-M2SF for 2 c/o (SPDT) contacts fork type screw 1SVR 405 651 R1300 CR-M4SF for 2 or 4 c/o (SPDT) contacts fork type screw 1SVR 405 651 R3300 Accessories for CR-M sockets
CR-MH Plastic holder 1SVR 405 659 R1000
CR-MH1 Metall holder 1SVR 405 659 R1100
CR-MJ Jumper bar for sockets with screw clamps 1SVR 405 658 R6000 CR-MM Marker 1SVR 405 658 R1000

Page 1241 of 1513 ends

6 - Pluggable interface relays CR-M | Data sheet
Functions
Operating controls
1 Socket
2 Pluggable function module
3 Interface relay
4 Holder
Application
Interface relays are electromechanic and electronic input and output modules for electrical isolation, levelling, noise suppression or signal amplifi cation between control unit and process.

Operating mode
When control supply voltage is applied, the output contacts get closed. When control supply voltage is switched off, the contacts fall back into their starting position. Manual operation and locking of the output relays is possible via the integrated test button.

Note:

During operation of the relay the test button is warming up. To manually press the test button, first switch off the supply voltage of the relay and wait for a while until the button cools down (or press without delay, using protective gloves or insulated tools).

Press the button smoothly and quickly. As long as the button is pressed the n/o contacts are closed. Releasing the button opens the n/o contacts. A 90 degree rotation of the test button closes the n/o contacts permanently. Reverse rotation of the test button re-opens the n/o contacts. 2CDC 295 003 F0011 4 3
2 1

Page 1242 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 1 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)
Feed-through terminal block, Connection method: Push-in connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 26 - 12, Width: 5.2 mm, Height: 35.3 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15 Why buy this product
■ The Push-in connection terminal blocks are characterized by the system features of the CLIPLINE complete system and by easy and toolfree wiring of conductors with ferrules or solid conductors ■ The compact design and front connection enable wiring in a confined space ■ In addition to the testing facility in the double function shaft, all terminal blocks provide an additional test connection ■ Tested for railway applications
Key Commercial Data
Packing unit 50 STK
Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 10.6 g
Custom tariff number 85369040
Country of origin Germany
Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Number of connections 4
Potentials 1
Nominal cross section 2.5 mm²
Color gray
Insulating material PA
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Area of application Railway industry
Machine building
Plant engineering
Process industry

Page 1243 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 2 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Technical data
General
Rated surge voltage 8 kV
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category III
Insulating material group I
Maximum load current
28 A (In case of a 4 mm² conductor cross section, the maximum load current must not be exceeded by the total current of all connected conductors.)
Nominal current IN 24 A (with 2.5 mm² conductor connection cross section) Nominal voltage UN 800 V
Open side panel Yes
Shock protection test specification DIN EN 50274 (VDE 0660-514):2002-11 Back of the hand protection guaranteed
Finger protection guaranteed
Result of surge voltage test Test passed
Surge voltage test setpoint 9.8 kV
Result of power-frequency withstand voltage test Test passed Power frequency withstand voltage setpoint 2 kV
Result of the test for mechanical stability of terminal points (5 x conductor connection) Test passed
Result of bending test Test passed
Bending test rotation speed 10 rpm
Bending test turns 135
Bending test conductor cross section/weight 0.14 mm² / 0.2 kg

2.5 mm² / 0.7 kg
4 mm² / 0.9 kg
Tensile test result Test passed
Conductor cross section tensile test 0.14 mm²
Tractive force setpoint 10 N
Conductor cross section tensile test 2.5 mm²
Tractive force setpoint 50 N
Conductor cross section tensile test 4 mm²
Tractive force setpoint 60 N
Result of tight fit on support Test passed
Tight fit on carrier NS 35
Setpoint 1 N
Result of voltage-drop test Test passed
Requirements, voltage drop ≤ 3.2 mV
Result of temperature-rise test Test passed
Short circuit stability result Test passed
Conductor cross section short circuit testing 2.5 mm²
Short-time current 0.3 kA

Page 1244 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 3 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Technical data
General
Conductor cross section short circuit testing 4 mm²
Short-time current 0.48 kA
Result of aging test Test passed
Ageing test for screwless modular terminal block temperature cycles 192 Result of thermal test Test passed
Proof of thermal characteristics (needle flame) effective duration 30 s Oscillation, broadband noise test result Test passed
Test specification, oscillation, broadband noise DIN EN 50155 (VDE 0115-200):2008-03 Test spectrum Service life test category 2, bogie mounted Test frequency f1 = 5 Hz to f2 = 250 Hz
ASD level 6.12 (m/s2
)
2 /Hz
Acceleration 3.12 g
Test duration per axis 5 h
Test directions X-, Y- and Z-axis
Shock test result Test passed
Test specification, shock test DIN EN 50155 (VDE 0115-200):2008-03 Shock form Half-sine
Acceleration 30g
Shock duration 18 ms
Number of shocks per direction 3
Test directions X-, Y- and Z-axis (pos. and neg.)
Relative insulation material temperature index (Elec., UL 746 B) 130 °C Temperature index of insulation material (DIN EN 60216-1 (VDE 0304-21)) 125 °C
Static insulating material application in cold -60 °C
Flame test method (DIN EN 60695-11-10) V0
Oxygen index (DIN EN ISO 4589-2) >32 %
2 passed
passed
passed
28 MJ/kg
HL 1 - HL 3
HL 1 - HL 3
HL 1 - HL 3
HL 1 - HL 3
Dimensions
Width 5.2 mm
End cover width 2.2 mm
Length 72.2 mm

Page 1245 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 4 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Technical data
Dimensions
Height 35.3 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 36.8 mm
Height NS 35/15 44.3 mm
Connection data
Connection method Push-in connection
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-1
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 4 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm²
Min. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 26
Max. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 14
Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min. 0.14 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min. 0.14 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max. 2.5 mm² 2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max. 0.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Stripping length 8 mm ... 10 mm
Internal cylindrical gage A3
Standards and Regulations
Connection in acc. with standard CSA
IEC 60947-7-1
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27141121
eCl@ss 4.1 27141121
eCl@ss 5.0 27141120
eCl@ss 5.1 27141120
eCl@ss 6.0 27141120
eCl@ss 7.0 27141120
eCl@ss 8.0 27141120
eCl@ss 9.0 27141120

Page 1246 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 5 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Classifications
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000897
ETIM 3.0 EC000897
ETIM 4.0 EC000897
ETIM 5.0 EC000897
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211811
UNSPSC 7.0901 39121410
UNSPSC 11 39121410
UNSPSC 12.01 39121410
UNSPSC 13.2 39121410
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
CSA / UL Recognized / VDE Zeichengenehmigung / cUL Recognized / RS / ABS / NK / IECEE CB Scheme / BV / EAC / NK / EAC / DNV GL / cULus Recognized
Ex Approvals
ATEX / IECEx / EAC Ex
Approvals submitted
Approval details
CSA
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
UL Recognized
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12

Page 1247 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 6 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Approvals
B C
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
VDE Zeichengenehmigung
mm²/AWG/kcmil 0.2-2.5
Nominal current IN 24 A
Nominal voltage UN 800 V
cUL Recognized
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
RS
ABS
NK
IECEE CB Scheme
mm²/AWG/kcmil 0.2-2.5
Nominal voltage UN 800 V
BV
EAC
NK
EAC

Page 1248 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209578
07/15/2016   Page 7 / 7
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO - 3209578
Approvals
DNV GL
cULus Recognized
Phoenix Contact 2016 © - all rights reserved
http://www.phoenixcontact.com

Page 1249 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209581
07/15/2016   Page 1 / 5
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO BU - 3209581 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)
Feed-through terminal block, Connection method: Push-in connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 26 - 12, Width: 5.2 mm, Height: 35.3 mm, Color: blue, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15 Why buy this product
■ The Push-in connection terminal blocks are characterized by the system features of the CLIPLINE complete system and by easy and toolfree wiring of conductors with ferrules or solid conductors ■ The compact design and front connection enable wiring in a confined space ■ In addition to the testing facility in the double function shaft, all terminal blocks provide an additional test connection ■ Tested for railway applications
Key Commercial Data
Packing unit 50 STK
Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 10.65 g
Custom tariff number 85369040
Country of origin Germany
Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Number of connections 4
Potentials 1
Nominal cross section 2.5 mm²
Color blue
Insulating material PA
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Area of application Railway industry
Machine building
Plant engineering
Process industry

Page 1250 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209581
07/15/2016   Page 2 / 5
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO BU - 3209581 Technical data
General
Rated surge voltage 8 kV
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category III
Insulating material group I
Maximum load current
28 A (In case of a 4 mm² conductor cross section, the maximum load current must not be exceeded by the total current of all connected conductors.)
Nominal current IN 24 A (with 2.5 mm² conductor connection cross section) Nominal voltage UN 800 V
Open side panel Yes
Dimensions
Width 5.2 mm
End cover width 2.2 mm
Length 72.2 mm
Height 35.3 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 36.8 mm
Height NS 35/15 44.3 mm
Connection data
Connection method Push-in connection
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-1
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 4 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm²
Min. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 26
Max. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 14
Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min. 0.14 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min. 0.14 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max. 2.5 mm² 2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max. 0.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Stripping length 8 mm ... 10 mm
Internal cylindrical gage A3
Standards and Regulations
Connection in acc. with standard CSA

Page 1251 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209581
07/15/2016   Page 3 / 5
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO BU - 3209581 Technical data
Standards and Regulations
IEC 60947-7-1
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27141121
eCl@ss 4.1 27141121
eCl@ss 5.0 27141120
eCl@ss 5.1 27141120
eCl@ss 6.0 27141120
eCl@ss 7.0 27141120
eCl@ss 8.0 27141120
eCl@ss 9.0 27141120
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000897
ETIM 3.0 EC000897
ETIM 4.0 EC000897
ETIM 5.0 EC000897
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211811
UNSPSC 7.0901 39121410
UNSPSC 11 39121410
UNSPSC 12.01 39121410
UNSPSC 13.2 39121410
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
CSA / UL Recognized / VDE Zeichengenehmigung / cUL Recognized / RS / ABS / NK / IECEE CB Scheme / BV / EAC / NK / EAC / DNV GL / cULus Recognized
Ex Approvals
ATEX / IECEx / EAC Ex
Approvals submitted

Page 1252 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209581
07/15/2016   Page 4 / 5
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO BU - 3209581 Approvals
Approval details
CSA
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
UL Recognized
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
VDE Zeichengenehmigung
mm²/AWG/kcmil 0.2-2.5
Nominal current IN 24 A
Nominal voltage UN 800 V
cUL Recognized
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
Nominal current IN 20 A 20 A
Nominal voltage UN 600 V 600 V
RS
ABS
NK

Page 1253 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209581
07/15/2016   Page 5 / 5
Feed-through terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO BU - 3209581 Approvals
IECEE CB Scheme
mm²/AWG/kcmil 0.2-2.5
Nominal voltage UN 800 V
BV
EAC
NK
EAC
DNV GL
cULus Recognized
Phoenix Contact 2016 © - all rights reserved
http://www.phoenixcontact.com

Page 1254 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209594
07/15/2016   Page 1 / 5
Ground modular terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE - 3209594 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)
Ground modular terminal block, Connection method: Push-in connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 26 - 12, Width: 5.2 mm, Height: 35.3 mm, Color: green-yellow, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15 Why buy this product
■ The Push-in connection terminal blocks are characterized by the system features of the CLIPLINE complete system and by easy and toolfree wiring of conductors with ferrules or solid conductors ■ The compact design and front connection enable wiring in a confined space ■ In addition to the testing facility in the double function shaft, all terminal blocks provide an additional test connection ■ Tested for railway applications
Key Commercial Data
Packing unit 50 STK
Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 13.55 g
Custom tariff number 85369040
Country of origin Germany
Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Number of connections 4
Potentials 1
Nominal cross section 2.5 mm²
Color green-yellow
Insulating material PA
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Area of application Railway industry
Machine building
Plant engineering
Process industry

Page 1255 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209594
07/15/2016   Page 2 / 5
Ground modular terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE - 3209594 Technical data
General
Rated surge voltage 8 kV
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category III
Insulating material group I
Open side panel Yes
Shock protection test specification DIN EN 50274 (VDE 0660-514):2002-11 Back of the hand protection guaranteed
Finger protection guaranteed
Oscillation, broadband noise test result Test passed
Test specification, oscillation, broadband noise DIN EN 50155 (VDE 0115-200):2008-03 Test spectrum Service life test category 2, bogie mounted Test frequency f1 = 5 Hz to f2 = 250 Hz
ASD level 6.12 (m/s2
)
2 /Hz
Acceleration 3.12 g
Test duration per axis 5 h
Test directions X-, Y- and Z-axis
Shock test result Test passed
Test specification, shock test DIN EN 50155 (VDE 0115-200):2008-03 Shock form Half-sine
Acceleration 30g
Shock duration 18 ms
Number of shocks per direction 3
Test directions X-, Y- and Z-axis (pos. and neg.)
Relative insulation material temperature index (Elec., UL 746 B) 130 °C Temperature index of insulation material (DIN EN 60216-1 (VDE 0304-21)) 125 °C
Static insulating material application in cold -60 °C
Dimensions
Width 5.2 mm
End cover width 2.2 mm
Length 72.2 mm
Height 35.3 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 36.8 mm
Height NS 35/15 44.3 mm
Connection data
Note Please observe the current carrying capacity of the DIN rails.

Connection method Push-in connection
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-2
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 4 mm²

Page 1256 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209594
07/15/2016   Page 3 / 5
Ground modular terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE - 3209594 Technical data
Connection data
Conductor cross section AWG min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm²
Min. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 26
Max. AWG conductor cross section, flexible 14
Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min. 0.14 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min. 0.14 mm² Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max. 2.5 mm² 2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max. 0.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Stripping length 8 mm ... 10 mm
Internal cylindrical gage A3
Standards and Regulations
Connection in acc. with standard CSA
IEC 60947-7-2
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27141118
eCl@ss 4.1 27141118
eCl@ss 5.0 27141118
eCl@ss 5.1 27141118
eCl@ss 6.0 27141141
eCl@ss 7.0 27141141
eCl@ss 8.0 27141141
eCl@ss 9.0 27141141
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000901
ETIM 3.0 EC000901
ETIM 4.0 EC000901
ETIM 5.0 EC000901
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211811

Page 1257 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209594
07/15/2016   Page 4 / 5
Ground modular terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE - 3209594 Classifications
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 7.0901 39121410
UNSPSC 11 39121410
UNSPSC 12.01 39121410
UNSPSC 13.2 39121410
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
CSA / UL Recognized / cUL Recognized / RS / ABS / NK / BV / VDE Zeichengenehmigung / IECEE CB Scheme / EAC / NK / EAC / DNV GL / cULus Recognized
Ex Approvals
ATEX / IECEx / EAC Ex
Approvals submitted
Approval details
CSA
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12
UL Recognized
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
cUL Recognized
B C
mm²/AWG/kcmil 26-12 26-12
RS

Page 1258 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3209594
07/15/2016   Page 5 / 5
Ground modular terminal block - PT 2,5-QUATTRO-PE - 3209594 Approvals
ABS
NK
BV
VDE Zeichengenehmigung
mm²/AWG/kcmil 0.2-2.5
IECEE CB Scheme
mm²/AWG/kcmil 2.5
EAC
NK
EAC
DNV GL
cULus Recognized
Phoenix Contact 2016 © - all rights reserved
http://www.phoenixcontact.com

Page 1259 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3030514
09/12/2016   Page 1 / 3
End cover - D-ST 2,5-QUATTRO - 3030514
Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)
End cover, Length: 72 mm, Width: 2.2 mm, Height: 36.5 mm, Color: gray Key Commercial Data
Packing unit 1 STK
GTIN
GTIN 4017918187972
Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 2.800 g
Custom tariff number 85389060
Country of origin Germany
Technical data
Environmental Product Compliance
China RoHS No hazardous substances above threshold values General
Color gray
Material PA
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Dimensions
Width 2.2 mm
Length 72 mm
Height 36.5 mm
General
Relative insulation material temperature index (Elec., UL 746 B) 130 °C Temperature index of insulation material (DIN EN 60216-1 (VDE 0304-21)) 125 °C
Static insulating material application in cold -60 °C

Page 1260 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3030514
09/12/2016   Page 2 / 3
End cover - D-ST 2,5-QUATTRO - 3030514
Technical data
General
Behavior in fire for rail vehicles (DIN 5510-2) Test passed Flame test method (DIN EN 60695-11-10) V0
Oxygen index (DIN EN ISO 4589-2) >32 %
NF F16-101, NF F10-102 Class I 2
NF F16-101, NF F10-102 Class F 2
Surface flammability NFPA 130 (ASTM E 162) passed
Specific optical density of smoke NFPA 130 (ASTM E 662) passed Smoke gas toxicity NFPA 130 (SMP 800C) passed
Calorimetric heat release NFPA 130 (ASTM E 1354) 27,5 MJ/kg Fire protection for rail vehicles (DIN EN 45545-2) R22 HL 1 - HL 3 Fire protection for rail vehicles (DIN EN 45545-2) R23 HL 1 - HL 3 Fire protection for rail vehicles (DIN EN 45545-2) R24 HL 1 - HL 3 Fire protection for rail vehicles (DIN EN 45545-2) R26 HL 1 - HL 3 Standards and Regulations
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27141111
eCl@ss 4.1 27141111
eCl@ss 5.0 27141133
eCl@ss 5.1 27141133
eCl@ss 6.0 27141133
eCl@ss 7.0 27141133
eCl@ss 8.0 27141133
eCl@ss 9.0 27141133
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000886
ETIM 3.0 EC000886
ETIM 4.0 EC000886
ETIM 5.0 EC000886
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211827
UNSPSC 7.0901 39121424
UNSPSC 11 39121424
UNSPSC 12.01 39121424
UNSPSC 13.2 39121424

Page 1261 of 1513 ends

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 1 / 9
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Extract from the online
catalog
PTTB 2,5
Order No.: 3210567
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3210567 Double-level terminal block, Cross section:  0.14 mm² - 4 mm², AWG: 26 - 12, Connection type: Push-in connection, Width: 5.2 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 35/7.5, NS 35/15
Commercial data
EAN
4 046356 418980
sales group A632
Pack 50 Pcs.

Customs tariff 85369010
Gross weight in pieces 0.012897 KG
Net weight per piece 0.012786 KG
Catalog page information Page 99 (CL1-2011)
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
06/16/2008
http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.

Technical data
General
Number of levels 2
Number of connections 4
Color gray
Insulating material PA
Inflammability class according to UL 94 V0

Page 1262 of 1513 ends

PTTB 2,5 Order No.: 3210567
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3210567 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 2 / 9
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Dimensions
Width 5.2 mm
Length 68 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 47.5 mm
Height NS 35/15 55 mm
Technical data
Rated surge voltage 6 kV
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Insulating material group I
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-1
Nominal current IN 22 A
Nominal voltage UN 500 V
Open side panel ja
Shock protection test specification DIN EN 50274 (VDE 0660-514):2002-11 Back of the hand protection guaranteed
Finger protection guaranteed
Surge voltage test setpoint 7.3 kV
Result of surge voltage test Test passed
Power frequency withstand voltage setpoint 1.89 kV
Result of power-frequency withstand voltage test Test passed Checking the mechanical stability of terminal
points (5 x conductor connection)
Test passed
Bending test rotation speed 10 rpm
Bending test turns 135
Bending test conductor cross section/weight 0.14 mm² / 0.2 kg

2.5 mm² / 0.7 kg
4 mm² / 0.9 kg
Result of bending test Test passed
Conductor cross section tensile test 0.14 mm²
Tractive force setpoint 10 N
Conductor cross section tensile test 2.5 mm²
Tractive force setpoint 50 N
Conductor cross section tensile test 4 mm²
Tractive force setpoint 60 N

Page 1263 of 1513 ends

PTTB 2,5 Order No.: 3210567
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3210567 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 3 / 9
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Tensile test result Test passed
Tight fit on carrier NS 35
Setpoint 1 N
Result of tight fit test Test passed
Requirements, voltage drop ≤ 3.2 mV
Result of voltage drop test Test passed
Temperature-rise test Test passed
Conductor cross section short circuit testing 2.5 mm²
Short-time current 0.3 kA
Conductor cross section short circuit testing 4 mm²
Short-time current 0.48 kA
Short circuit stability result Test passed
Ageing test for screwless modular terminal block
temperature cycles
192
Result of aging test Test passed
Proof of thermal characteristics (needle flame)
effective duration
30 s
Result of thermal test Test passed
Test specification, oscillation, broadband noise DIN EN 50155 (VDE 0115-200):2008-03 Test spectrum Service life test category 1, class B, on vehicle body Test frequency f1 = 5 Hz to f2 = 150 Hz
ASD level 0.02 g²/Hz
Acceleration 0.8 g
Test duration per axis 5 h
Test directions X-, Y- and Z-axis
Oscillation, broadband noise test result Test passed
Test specification, shock test DIN EN 50155 (VDE 0115-200):2008-03 Shock form Half-sine
Acceleration 5 g
Shock duration 30 ms
Number of shocks per direction 3
Test directions X-, Y- and Z-axis (pos. and neg.)
Shock test result Test passed
Temperature index, insulating material (DIN EN
60216-1 (VDE 0304-21))
130 °C

Page 1264 of 1513 ends

PTTB 2,5 Order No.: 3210567
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3210567 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 4 / 9
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Connection data
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 4 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max 12
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule
without plastic sleeve min.

0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule
without plastic sleeve max.

2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule
with plastic sleeve min.

0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule
with plastic sleeve max.

2.5 mm²
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded,
TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.

0.5 mm²
Connection method Push-in connection
Stripping length 10 mm
Internal cylindrical gage A3
Certificates / Approvals
Certification CSA, cULus Recognized, GOST, VDE Zeichengenehmigung, ABS, BV, GL, LR, NK, RS, IECEE CB Scheme
Certification Ex: ATEX, IECEx
Certifications applied for:

Accessories
Item Designation Description
Assembly
3030747 ATP-STTB 4 Partition plate, Length: 88.7 mm, Width: 2 mm, Height: 53 mm, Color: gray

Page 1265 of 1513 ends

PTTB 2,5 Order No.: 3210567
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3210567 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 5 / 9
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
3022218 CLIPFIX 35 Snap-on end bracket, for 35 mm NS 35/7.5 or NS 35/15 DIN rail, can be fitted with Zack strip ZB 8 and ZB 8/27, terminal strip marker KLM 2 and KLM, width: 9.5 mm, color: gray
3022276 CLIPFIX 35-5 Quick mounting end clamp for NS 35/7,5 DIN rail or NS 35/15 DIN rail, can be fitted with ZB 5 and ZBF 5 zack marker strip, KLM 2, KLM3, and KML3L terminal strip marker, parking option for FBS...5, FBS...6, KSS 5, KSS 6, width: 5.15 mm, color: gray 0801704 NS 35/ 7,5 AL UNPERF
2000MM
DIN rail, material: Aluminum, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1206560 NS 35/ 7,5 CAP DIN rail end piece, for DIN rail NS 35/7.5 0801762 NS 35/ 7,5 CU UNPERF
2000MM
DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
0801733 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: steel galvanized and passivated with a thick layer, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2000 mm 0801681 NS 35/ 7,5 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1204119 NS 35/ 7,5 WH PERF 2000MM DIN rail 35 mm (NS 35) 1204122 NS 35/ 7,5 WH UNPERF
2000MM
DIN rail 35 mm (NS 35)
1206421 NS 35/ 7,5 ZN PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Galvanized, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1206434 NS 35/ 7,5 ZN UNPERF
2000MM
DIN rail, material: Galvanized, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1201756 NS 35/15 AL UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, deep drawn, high profile, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, material: aluminum, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length 2000 mm 1206573 NS 35/15 CAP DIN rail end piece, for DIN rail NS 35/15 1201895 NS 35/15 CU UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1201730 NS 35/15 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: steel galvanized and passivated with a thick layer, perforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2000 mm 1201714 NS 35/15 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
0806602 NS 35/15 WH PERF 2000MM DIN rail 35 mm (NS 35)
1204135 NS 35/15 WH UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail 35 mm (NS 35) 1206599 NS 35/15 ZN PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Galvanized, perforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1206586 NS 35/15 ZN UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Galvanized, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1201798 NS 35/15-2,3 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, 2.3 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
Bridges
3030161 FBS 2-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red

Page 1266 of 1513 ends

PTTB 2,5 Order No.: 3210567
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3210567 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 6 / 9
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
3030174 FBS 3-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 3, Color: red 3030187 FBS 4-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 4, Color: red 3030190 FBS 5-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 5, Color: red 3030213 FBS 10-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 10, Color: red 3030226 FBS 20-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 20, Color: red 3038930 FBS 50-5 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 50, Color: red Covers
3211634 D-PTTB 2,5 End cover, Length: 68 mm, Width: 2.2 mm, Color: gray General
0800886 E/NS 35 N End clamp, width: 9.5 mm, color: gray 3032185 FBS-PV Vertical potential bridge, to connect the upper and lower level 3048564 PS-8/2,3MM RD Test adapter, Color: red
Marking
0800967 STP 5-2 Double marker carrier, snaps onto the double-level spring-cage terminal block STTB 2.5 and STTB 4, labeled with ZB 5 or ZBF 5 0800970 STP 5-2/S Double marker carrier, snaps onto the double-level spring-cage terminal block ZFKK 1,5, with MSTBV or ICV pick-off
0818153 UC-TMF 5 Marker for terminal blocks, Sheet, white, Unlabeled, Can be labeled with: Bluemark, Plotter, BLUEMARK CLED, Mounting type: Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 4.6 x 5.1 mm
0824638 UC-TMF 5 CUS Marker for terminal blocks, Can be ordered: By sheet, white, Labeled according to customer specifications, Mounting type:

Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 4.6 x 5.1 mm
0828744 UCT-TMF 5 Marker for terminal blocks, Sheet, white, Unlabeled, Can be labeled with: Thermomark C+, Thermomark C, Bluemark,
BLUEMARK CLED, Mounting type: Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 4.4 x 4.7 mm 0829658 UCT-TMF 5 CUS Marker for terminal blocks, Can be ordered: By sheet, white, Labeled according to customer specifications, Mounting type:

Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5.2 mm, Lettering field: 4.4 x 4.7 mm
0825025 ZBF 5 CUS Zack Marker strip, flat, Can be ordered: Strip, white, Labeled according to customer specifications, Mounting type: Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5 mm, Lettering field:

5.15 x 5.15 mm
0808642 ZBF 5:UNBEDRUCKT Zack Marker strip, flat, Strip, white, Unlabeled, Can be labeled with: Plotter, Mounting type: Snap into flat marker groove, For terminal block width: 5 mm, Lettering field: 5.1 x 5.2 mm

Page 1267 of 1513 ends

PTTB 2,5 Order No.: 3210567
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3210567 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 7 / 9
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Plug/Adapter
3036725 DP PS-5 Spacer plate, Color: red
3002843 ISH 2,5/0,2 Insulation stop sleeve, Color: white 3002856 ISH 2,5/0,5 Insulation stop sleeve, Color: gray 3002869 ISH 2,5/1,0 Insulation stop sleeve, Color: black 0201731 MPS-IH BK Insulating sleeve, Color: black
0201689 MPS-IH BU Insulating sleeve, Color: blue
0201702 MPS-IH GN Insulating sleeve, Color: green
0201728 MPS-IH GY Insulating sleeve, Color: gray
0201676 MPS-IH RD Insulating sleeve, Color: red
0201663 MPS-IH WH Insulating sleeve, Color: white
0201692 MPS-IH YE Insulating sleeve, Color: yellow
0201744 MPS-MT Test plugs
3032871 PAI-4-N GY Test adapter, Color: gray
3030983 PS-5 Test adapter, Color: red
3038723 PS-5/2,3MM RD Test plugs, Color: red
3038736 PS-6/2,3MM RD Test plugs, Color: red
Software
5146040 CLIP-PROJECT ADVANCED Multilingual software for easy planning of Phoenix Contact on DIN rails together with the integrated TRABTECH-select software module for planning comprehensive surge protection concepts. 5146053 CLIP-PROJECT

PROFESSIONAL
Multi-lingual software for terminal strip project planning. A marking module allows professional labeling of markers and labels for marking terminal blocks, conductors, cables and devices. The additionally integrated software module TRABTECH-select for planning comprehensive surge protection concepts.

Tools
1204517 SZF 1-0,6X3,5 Actuation tool, for ST terminal blocks, also suitable for use as a bladed screwdriver, size: 0.6 x 3.5 x 100 mm, 2-component grip, with non-slip grip

Page 1268 of 1513 ends

PTTB 2,5 Order No.: 3210567
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3210567 PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 8 / 9
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Drawings
Circuit diagram

Page 1269 of 1513 ends

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 1 / 3
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Extract from the online
catalog
D-PTTB 2,5
Order No.: 3211634
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3211634 End cover, Length: 68 mm, Width: 2.2 mm, Color: gray
Commercial data
EAN
4 046356 428378
sales group A692
Pack 50 Pcs.

Customs tariff 85389099
Gross weight in pieces 0.00326 KG
Net weight per piece 0.00326 KG
Catalog page information Page 99 (CL1-2011)
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
06/23/2008
http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.

Certificates / Approvals
Certification GOST
Certifications applied for:

Certification Ex:

Page 1270 of 1513 ends

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 1 / 2
http://www.phoenixcontact.com Dec 3, 2012
Extract from the online
catalog
FBS 2-5
Order No.: 3030161
http://catalog.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=3030161 Plug-in bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red
Commercial data
EAN
4 017918 188511
sales group A690
Pack 50 Pcs.

Customs tariff 85389099
Gross weight in pieces 0.001696 KG
Net weight per piece 0.001684 KG
Catalog page information Page 390 (CL1-2011)
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
01/01/2003
http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.

Certificates / Approvals
Certification
Certifications applied for:

Certification Ex:

Page 1271 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3022276
07/15/2016   Page 1 / 2
End clamp - CLIPFIX 35-5 - 3022276
Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)
Quick mounting end clamp for NS 35/7,5 DIN rail or NS 35/15 DIN rail, with marking option, with parking option for FBS...5, FBS...6, KSS 5, KSS 6, width: 5.15 mm, color: gray Why buy this product
■ Phoenix Contact has engineered its CLIPFIX end brackets to maintain a secure grip on the various DIN rail systems ■ Design width of just 5.2 mm
■ Parking option for bridges and plugs
■ Large-surface labeling
Key Commercial Data
Packing unit 50 STK
Minimum order quantity 50 STK
GTIN
Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 5.13 g
Custom tariff number 39269099
Country of origin Germany
Technical data
Dimensions
Height 35 mm
Length 48.5 mm
Width 5.15 mm
General
Material PA
Color gray
Standards and Regulations
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V2

Page 1272 of 1513 ends

https://www.phoenixcontact.com/ca/products/3022276
07/15/2016   Page 2 / 2
End clamp - CLIPFIX 35-5 - 3022276
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27141199
eCl@ss 4.1 27141199
eCl@ss 5.0 27141135
eCl@ss 5.1 27141135
eCl@ss 6.0 27141135
eCl@ss 7.0 27141135
eCl@ss 8.0 27141135
eCl@ss 9.0 27141135
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000761
ETIM 3.0 EC001041
ETIM 4.0 EC001041
ETIM 5.0 EC001041
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30212109
UNSPSC 7.0901 39121708
UNSPSC 11 39121708
UNSPSC 12.01 39121708
UNSPSC 13.2 39121708
Phoenix Contact 2016 © - all rights reserved
http://www.phoenixcontact.com

Page 1273 of 1513 ends

PHOENIX CONTACT Ltd Page 1 / 3
http://www.phoenixcontact.ca 9-Mar-2012
Extract from the online
catalog
NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM
Order No.: 0801733
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.ca/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=0801733 DIN rail, material: steel galvanized and passivated with a thick layer, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2000 mm Commercial data
EAN
4 017918 006686
Pack 2 m
Customs tariff 72287010
Catalog page information Page 341 (CL2-2011)
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:

Jan/13/2006
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation at http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com.

The General Terms and Conditions
of Use apply to Internet downloads.

Technical data
General data
Height 7.5 mm
Length 2000 mm
Width 35 mm
Material Steel
Coating Galvanized, passivated with a thick layer
Color silver
Test standard In acc. with EN 60715: 2001

Page 1274 of 1513 ends

NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM Order No.: 0801733
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.ca/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=0801733 PHOENIX CONTACT Ltd Page 2 / 3
http://www.phoenixcontact.ca 9-Mar-2012
Drawings
Dimensioned drawing

Page 1275 of 1513 ends

› £“ !" 
#$%& ' ( %)* +),)
- ./01 231 3
4567 .38 7 ./01 958 1 3:; < 3.:; = >> ? @A B B B CD> ? @A - ./01 958 1 3:; < 3.:; @AE FA GH ? @A B B B CID ? @A E JH ? FA B B B CH> ? FA K< ;L0;.MN < 3.:; DH OP B B B IH OP E > OP
A0< < ;.1 M5.Q06/1 7 5. R .567 .38 8 532S @//< 5!B >B I @ R = C> ? @AS E @//< 5!B >B T @ R CT> ? @AS - .< 0QU M0< < ;.1 8 7 67 1 31 7 5. 31 CHVA R1 N/B S E - W 1 X = H @ E X >B I @W Q Y37 .Q Z0[ [ ;< 7 .: R - \] 1 N/B S ^ CH 6Q R = C> ? @AS E ^ = H> 6Q RCT> ? @AS - ./01 [ 0Q; TB = H @ R Q8 5_`Z8 5_] 7 .1 ;< .38 S
a;M566;.2;2 Z3Mb0/ [ 0Q;] cd Q_7 1 MU eI] e= >] e= I
f01 /01 231 3
4567 .38 501 /01 958 1 3:; CD ? FA g=h
d;1 1 7 .: < 3.:; 5[ 1 U; 501 /01 958 1 3:; CCB H ? FA B B B CJB H ? FA R ^ CD ? M5.Q1 3.1 M3/3M7 1 3.M;S f01 /01 M0< < ;.1 = B iH @
A3. Z; M5..;M1 ;2 7 . /3< 38 8 ;8 E Q;< 7 ;Q j;Q E j;Q
Y3!B /5_;< 27 QQ7 /31 7 5. R 7 28 7 .:E .567 .38 8 532S X >B i k E H k [ [ 7 M7 ;.MN R 1 N/B S ^ GJh R [ 5< CT> ? @A 3.2 .567 .38 938 0;QS a;Q7 2038 < 7 //8 ; X I> 6?ll
d7 :.38 7 .:
d7 :.38 7 .: FA fm c F
n;.;< 38 231 3
k;7 :U1 E F7 6;.Q7 5.Q k ! O ! F >B C b: E HD ! J> ! I= 66 - .Q1 38 8 31 7 5. /5Q7 1 7 5. U5< 7 P5.1 38 F- 4 < 37 8 4d TH] 4 I>i= H d/3M7 .: _U;. 650.1 7 .: A3. Z; 38 7 :.;2" U5< 7 P5.1 38 > M6] 9;< 1 7 M38 T M6 A5..;M1 7 5. 6;1 U52 dM< ;_ M5..;M1 7 5.
- ./01 M5..;M1 7 5. 231 3 Q58 7 2 E Q1 < 3.2;2 E @kn >B C ` CB H 66o E >B C ` CB H 66o E CD ` = C f01 /01 M5..;M1 7 5. 231 3 Q58 7 2 E Q1 < 3.2;2 E @kn >B C ` CB H 66o E >B C ` CB H 66o E CD ` = C F;:< ;; 5[ /< 51 ;M1 7 5. E p<51 ;M1 7 5. M8 3QQ - pC> E - - YqeK R31 .567 .38 8 532] D>VAS ^ H>>] >>> U
@6Z7 ;.1 1 ;6/;< 31 0< ; R 5/;< 31 7 5.S ` CHVA B B B i>VA R^ HHVA 2;< 31 7 .:S d1 3.23< 2Q E < ;:08 31 7 5.Q
- .Q08 31 7 5. 958 1 3:; 7 ./01 E 501 /01 C b? @A R < 501 7 .; 1 ;Q1 S E D b? @A R 1 N/; 1 ;Q1 S 8 ;M1 < 563:.;1 7 M M56/31 7 Z7 8 7 1 N A5.[ 5< 63.M; _7 1 U YA F7 < ;M1 7 9; C>>DE = >GE A 8 ;M1 < 7 M38 Q3[ ;1 N] Q3[ ;1 N 1 < 3.Q[ 5< 6;< - A I>JH>` = E ?F >G>H R d c?S ] - A I= HHG` C` = i 8 ;M1 < 5.7 M ;L07 /6B [ 5< ;8 ;M1 < 7 M38 /5_;< 7 .Q1 38 8 31 7 5.Q 4 H>= iGE ?F >= I> Rp c?S d3[ ; 7 Q58 31 7 5. F- 4 ?F >= >>` D= >] F- 4 ?F >= >I` = >= > rc 3//< 5938 Q rcE A`rc 8 7 Q1 ;2 rc H>G] rcE A` rc < ;M5:.7 P;2 rc I>JH>] 4 A A8 3QQ C 3Q /;< rc = T= >] rcE A`rc 8 7 Q1 ;2 @4d- E - d@`= CB = CB >= A8 3QQ - ] F7 97 ` Q7 5. C] n< 50/Q @] e] A] F
c7 67 1 31 7 5. 5[ U3< 65.7 M 8 7 .; M0< < ;.1 Q 4 I= >>>` T`C st+$t ( 'u +),)
F;QM< 7 /1 7 5. vwxy z{|y{ }~
pMQB E
pb1 B
€~y{ ‚ƒxx„ w ƒ
† ‡ ˆ /< 7 63<N` Q_7 1 MU;2
‰vŠ€‹ €‰Œ  ŽŒ ‘’Œ   “” •–•–‘• =
—˜™ pOf 4- š Af4q@Aq
N (-)
L (+) +
+
–
–
STEP POWER - Power supply units
for distributor boards and flat control
panels
– Energy savings thanks to maximum energy efficiency and incredibly low no-load losses
– Flexible assembly by simply snapping the
product onto the DIN rail or screwing it
onto an even surface
– Reliable power supply thanks to the high
MTBF (mean time between failures) of
more than 500,000 hours and the UI characteristic curve – Approved for DeviceNet:
24 V DC, 100 W (NEC Class 2)
STEP POWER, 100 W
– Output power limited to 100 W: Specifically for applications that require certification according to UL 1310/508 listed Class 2
INTERFACE Power Supply

STEP POWER
H
D W
›œ$t žŸ    * ¡¢
£ ¤¥¢ ¦§ ¨ ©¥¢ £ ª «¬ ¤

Page 1276 of 1513 ends
Page 1277 of 1513 ends
Page 1278 of 1513 ends

Controls Philosophy
Water
Confidence™

SECTION CONTENTS
CP810206 - Rev 1.1

CONTROLS

PHILOSOPHY

Page 1279 of 1513 ends

Water
Confidence™
Controls Philosophy
Controls Philosophy

Page 1280 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 1 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
UVSIGNA CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY – El Centro, CA
Project # 810206
Build Sheet Rev. C
Table of Contents

1. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2 Acronyms and Abbreviations.............................................................................................................................. 2 Controller I/O Layout .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Site Specific Configurations ............................................................................................................................... 3 Custom (Site Specific) Programming ................................................................................................................. 3 Safety Features .................................................................................................................................................. 3

2. Control System Overview.............................................................................................................................................. 4 System Control Center (SCC)............................................................................................................................ 4 Power Distribution Center (PDC) ....................................................................................................................... 4 Hydraulic System Center (HSC)......................................................................................................................... 5 System Fault Conditions .................................................................................................................................... 5 Security............................................................................................................................................................... 9

3. Bank Control.................................................................................................................................................................. 9 Control Architecture............................................................................................................................................ 9 Bank Control Mode Selection...........................................................................................................................10 Bank Control Mode Operation..........................................................................................................................10 Bank Fault System Control Behavior ...............................................................................................................11

4. Hydraulic Control.........................................................................................................................................................11 Control Architecture..........................................................................................................................................11 HSC Lift Control................................................................................................................................................11 Wiping Control Modes ......................................................................................................................................12 Hydraulic System Fault System Control Behavior ...........................................................................................13

5. Flow Input....................................................................................................................................................................14 Flow Measurement Modes ...............................................................................................................................14 Flow Fault System Control Behavior................................................................................................................14

6. UVT Input Signal .........................................................................................................................................................14 UVT Measurement Modes ...............................................................................................................................14 UVT Fault System Control Behavior ................................................................................................................14

7. Intensity Input Signal...................................................................................................................................................15 Intensity Measurement Modes .........................................................................................................................15 Intensity Fault System Behavior.......................................................................................................................15

8. Auto Pacing ................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Equipment Pacing (SCC Controller).................................................................................................................15 Dose Pacing .....................................................................................................................................................18 Auto Pacing Fault System Control Behavior....................................................................................................18

9. Power Failure detection...............................................................................................................................................18 Power Failure at SCC.......................................................................................................................................18 Power Failure Detected by BCB.......................................................................................................................19 Power Failure Fault System Control Behavior ................................................................................................. 19

10. System Trending......................................................................................................................................................19

11. Plant SCADA interface ............................................................................................................................................20 Plant SCADA Interface Architecture.................................................................................................................20 Plant SCADA Addressing Summary ................................................................................................................20 Plant SCADA Interface Read Data...................................................................................................................20 SCADA Interface Write Data ............................................................................................................................22 SCADA Fault Conditions ..................................................................................................................................22

Page 1281 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 2 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary

1. GENERAL
The objective of this document is to provide details regarding the control strategy for the Trojan UVSigna™ disinfection system. The controls philosophy outlines the major hardware components, system status, alarm conditions and the modes of operation of the UV system.

Acronyms and Abbreviations
BCB Bank Control Board
HSC Hydraulic System Center
PDC Power Distribution Center
RED Reduction Equivalent Dose
SBC Sensor Based Control
SBR Sequencing Batch Reactor
SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
SCC System Control Center
UV Ultraviolet
UVT Ultraviolet Transmittance
UVI Ultraviolet Intensity
Controller I/O Layout
The following is the list of controller hardware included in the SCC.

Type Details
Operator Interface Allen Bradley PanelView Plus 7 Performance 10” Controller Processor Allen Bradley CompactLogix 1769-L33ER Board Communication ProSoft MVI69E-MBS
Analog Input Card Allen Bradley 1769-IF4
Discrete Output Card Allen Bradley 1769-OB16
Discrete Input Card Allen Bradley 1769-IQ16
Communication Allen Bradley CompactLogix 1769-L33ER
ProSoft Modbus Communications
Port No. Function Devices Addresses
1 Channel 1 PDC Communication
Channel 1 HSC Communication
Bank 1A, Bank 1B, Bank 1C,
HSC 1A
11, 12, 13,
10 2 Channel 2 PDC Communication
Channel 2 HSC Communication
Bank 2A, Bank 2B, Bank 2C,
HSC 2A
21, 22, 23,
10 Analog Input Card
• Flow Signal
Discrete Output Card
• No Common Minor Alarm
• No Common Major Alarm
• No Common Critical Alarm
Discrete Input Card
• SCC on Battery Power
• UPS Device OK

Page 1282 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 3 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
Site Specific Configurations
The following parameters were used to configure the UV system and are specific to the site.

Item Configuration Description
Number of Channels 2
Number of Banks per Channel 3
Number of Rows per Bank 2
Number of Lamps per Bank 8
Number of HSCs per Channel 1
High Water Level Sensing No
Low Water Level Sensing Yes 1/Channel
Analog Water Level Sensing No
UV Intensity Measurement Yes 1/Bank
UVT Measurement Manual
Flow Measurement Analog
SCADA Ethernet
UPS Yes
Inlet Gate Present No
Outlet Gate Present No
System Peak Flow 16.0 MGD
Peak Flow Per Channel 8.0 MGD
Validation Report 2 Row High UVT IUVA Carollo MS2T1 V1.0 Microbe Sensitivity MS2
D10 20.0
Design Target RED 30 mJ/cm²
Design UVT 62%
EOLL Hours 15000
Fouling Factor 0.94
Custom (Site Specific) Programming
• Not applicable for this project.

Safety Features
The UVSigna control strategy employs equipment protection measures as well as monitoring of a number of alarm conditions that will result in control action designed to maintain the delivered RED.

The first critical interlock condition that will disable a bank of UV lamps is a “Bank Not in Place” alarm. The alarm input is wired directly to the contactor of the respective bank; the BCB will also override all lamps under its control to an off state immediately. This alarm will also disable the automatic wiping functionality of the affected bank.

The second critical condition that will disable a bank of UV lamps is a PDC “Panel High Temperature” alarm.

This alarm input is wired directly to the BCB of the respective bank (one BCB per bank); the BCB will override all lamps under its control to an off state immediately.

Page 1283 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 4 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
The third critical condition that will disable a bank(s) of UV lamps is a “Low Water Level” alarm. Each channel is equipped with a separate channel low water level sensor. The signal from this sensor is connected to the BCB “Low Water Level” discrete input of each bank in the channel as a “Bank Low Water Level” for local protection of the bank.

Certain other alarm conditions will trigger a control action that may result in a bank being shut down and another bank coming on in its place, or will result in all banks running at full power. These alarm conditions are more fully described later in this document.

2. CONTROL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Control Center (SCC)
SCC provides the following functionality:
• System Setup
• Control and Monitoring of:
o System
o Channels
o Banks
o Lamp Drivers
o Lamps
o HSC/Wiper Groups
• Alarming
• Trending and Data Logging
• Process Parameter Measurement:
o Flow
o UV Transmittance (UVT)
o Channel Water Level
• Equipment Pacing
• SCADA Communication
The SCC communicates to the BCB(s) and HSC(s) through one or more Modbus RS-485 networks, dependent on the site configuration.

Controller Fault System Control Behavior
A Controller fault is major in nature and no control action can be taken. Refer to Section 2.04 System Fault Conditions for more information.

Power Distribution Center (PDC)
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) houses the components used to control bank(s). The controller for each bank is Trojan’s Bank Control Board (BCB). The BCB performs the following functions:
• Lamp Driver power control
• Bank operating mode: “Local On” / “Local Off” / “Remote” • Bank Hours/Cycle management
• UV Intensity (UVI) measurement
• Dose pacing
• Monitor and response to critical system interlocks
• PDC protection

Page 1284 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 5 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
The PDC also houses the Lamp Drivers for the banks under its control, and the electrical power distribution network used to route power to each Lamp Driver. The BCB(s) communicates with the Lamp Drivers through a Modbus RS-485 network and the SCC through a separate Modbus RS-485 network.

Hydraulic System Center (HSC)
The controller of the HSC controls the hydraulic operations for up to four (4) banks in the system; the banks controlled by the same HSC must be in the same channel. The hydraulic operations for each bank include the wiping control of one wiper group per bank, and the bank lifting control. The HSC performs the following functions:
• Automatic wiping controls
• Manual wiping operations
• Hydraulic parameter measurements
• Hydraulic pump protection
• UV bank lift operation (raising and lowering of bank) The HSC(s) communicates with the SCC through a Modbus RS-485 network.

System Fault Conditions
The UV system is subject to a number of fault conditions, which may be a minor, major or critical in nature. All alarms are subject to a minor, major, critical or individually configured alarm delay timers. The following table describes and depicts alarm structure.

Critical
Alarms:

Indicates that immediate attention is required. The UV system will partially or completely shut down until the fault is cleared. Alarms may be latched and require a reset from the Operator Interface after the alarm condition is remedied.

System Level Alarm Name Description Controls Action In Remote Auto System SCC Run On UPS The SCC is running on UPS power
after a SCC power loss.

No control action taken.

Bank PDC High Temperature Shutdown The PDC temperature has increased beyond the high limit.
(Latched)
BCB will turn off the lamp drivers,
bank flagged as unhealthy. Another
bank will be brought online if
possible.

PDC Bank Disconnect Off The disconnect switch for a given bank is in an “Open” state
BCB will turn off the lamp drivers,
bank flagged as unhealthy. Another
bank will be brought online if
possible.

Bank Not In Place The “Bank Not In Place” proximity
sensor indicates that the bank is
not in place in the channel.
(Latched)
BCB will turn off the lamp drivers,
bank flagged as unhealthy. Another
bank will be brought online if
possible.

Bank Low Water Level Shutdown With flow present, channel water level is below the low mechanical
setpoint after the low water alarm
time has expired.

BCB will turn off the lamp drivers,
bank flagged as unhealthy. Another
bank will be brought online if
possible.

Page 1285 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 6 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
Major Alarms: Indicates that immediate attention is required, otherwise damage may occur or disinfection performance may be compromised. The UV system does not shutdown; however, control actions may be taken to achieve disinfection.

System Level Alarm Name Description Controls Action In Remote Auto System Low UV Dose Calculated RED is below the
System RED setpoint.

Open all channels and run all
available banks at full power
Not Enough Healthy Channels
(latched)
System requires more channels for
disinfection than are available
Open all channels and run all
available banks at full power
Low UVT – Out of Validation Range UVT is below Low UVT Validation Range setpoint.

Open all channels and run all
available banks at full power
Flow Meter Fault The 4-20mA Flow signal input is
below 2mA or above 20.5mA
Use “Default” Flow and run the
system at full capacity for
disinfection.

High Flow – Out of Validation
Range
Flow is above High Flow Validation
Range setpoint.

Open all channels and run all
available banks at full power.

Low Flow Flow is below preset setpoint. All banks will time-off if minimum number of banks configured as “0”
and minimum number of channels
configured as “0” or “1”.

Controller Fault Controller/module fault exists. Controller faults out. No action can be taken.

HSC SCC-HSC Communication Fault The HSC is not responding to polling from SCC.

Remote wiping disabled for this
HSC.

HSC Hydraulic Tank Low Level Hydraulic tank low level pressure signal is detected.

HSC turns hydraulic pump off
immediately. Wipers and lifting are
disabled for this HSC.

HSC Pump Fault The hydraulic pump fails to turn
on/off when requested. (Latched)
HSC turns hydraulic pump off
immediately. Wipers and lifting are
disabled for this HSC until condition
reset at HSC.

Channel Not Enough Healthy Banks
Available
There are not enough banks
available to meet the RED setpoint.

Banks in the channel are run at
100% power until another healthy
channel can be brought online (if
available) or the fault is cleared.

Bank SCC-PDC Communication Fault The BCB is not responding to polling from the SCC.

Bank is flagged as unhealthy. The
bank is run at full power by BCB if
option selected at Operator
Interface.

Multiple Lamp Failure Number of failed lamps has
reached or exceeded Multiple
Lamp Failure Setpoint. (Latched)
Bank is flagged as unhealthy.

Another bank will be brought online
if possible.

BCB Dipswitch Mismatch The Dipswitch configuration on the BCB does not match the expected
configuration.

Bank is flagged as unhealthy.

Another bank will be brought online
if possible.

Bank Configuration Mismatch The bank configuration in the System Settings does not match
the actual configuration of the bank
at the BCB.

Bank is flagged as unhealthy.

Another bank will be brought online
if possible.

Not Enough Healthy Lamps There are no lamps in the bank available to operate.

BCB will turn off the lamp drivers,
bank is flagged as unhealthy.

Another bank will be brought online
if possible.

UVI Sensor Fault - SBC The 4-20mA signal from the bank
UVI sensor is below 2mA or above

20.5mA. Only applies if the
operator configurable “Use
Theoretical” setting is Never.

No control action taken.

Page 1286 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 7 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
System Level Alarm Name Description Controls Action In Remote Auto UVI Sensor Lower Than Expected
– SBC - Latched
The UVI sensor is reading lower
than the theoretical limit value.

Bank is flagged as unhealthy.

Another bank will be brought online
if possible.

Wiper Group Jammed Wiper hits high pressure within
“Minimum Wiper Travel Time” when
this wiper is moving. (Latched).

The affected wiper group is
disabled until condition reset at
HSC.

Wiper Travel Time Exceeded The wiper has exceeded the
maximum travel time while
retracting or extending. (Latched)
The affected wiper group is
disabled until condition reset at
HSC.

Minor Alarms: Indicates that the UV system requires maintenance but it is operating in compliance. Alarms are not latched and no reset is required. No other actions will be taken.

System Level Alarm Name Description Controls Action In Remote Auto System Controller Battery Low The battery in the controller is low and will not be able to maintain the
program in the event of a power
failure.

No control action taken.

System Power On Reset System has experienced a power
on reset condition.

Maintain normal operation as it was
prior to power outage.

SCC Power Restored SCC power has been restored. No control action taken.

UPS Fault The UPS backup for the SCC has a
fault.

No control action taken.

SCADA Fault The Plant SCADA network has
stopped communication with the
Controller.

If SCADA is used to provide flow
and the SCADA Alarm Action
System Setting is set to “Alarm and
Default”, the “Default” Flow will be
used.

System In Transition Indicates that a Low UV Dose
Alarm was inhibited during a
System Transition (bringing on
channel or bank).

No control action taken.

Low UVT Alarm UVT is below preset low limit
setpoint.

No control action taken.

UVT Below Design Value UVT is below the design value. No control action taken.

High UVT – Out of Validation
Range
Check Validation Range mode only
–UVT is above High UVT Validation
Range setpoint.

No control action taken.

Flow Meter Override Value Used Manually entered Flow Override value is being used.

No control action taken.

Low Flow – Out of Validation
Range
Check Validation Range mode only
– Flow is below Low Flow
Validation Range setpoint.

No control action taken.

HSC HSC Remote Wipe Inhibited Conditions exists that will not allow a remote wipe of any HSC wiper
groups.

Remote wiping is disabled for this
HSC.

Channel Channel Design Flow Exceeded Channel Flow exceeds the Design Flow setpoint.

No control action taken.

Channel Maximum Flow Velocity
Exceeded
Channel Flow exceeds the
Maximum Flow Velocity setpoint.

No control action taken.

Channel Flow Limit For Wiping
Exceeded
Channel Flow exceeds the
Maximum Flow for Wiping setpoint.

Wiper groups in the channel will be
disabled
Channel Maintenance Mode
Enabled
Channel has been placed into
Maintenance Mode
Channel will be unable to run in
Auto mode. Channel and Bank
Alarms to SCADA will be masked.

Page 1287 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 8 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
System Level Alarm Name Description Controls Action In Remote Auto Bank Bank Not In Remote Auto The bank is not in “Remote Auto” Mode.

Bank is excluded from Auto Pacing.

Bank Low Water Level Warning With flow present, channel water level is below the low mechanical
setpoint for less than the minor
alarm time.

No control action taken.

PDC Fan Failure The PDC fan has a fault, as
indicated by a BCB input.

No control action taken.

PDC High Temperature Warning Warning that the PDC cabinet temperature is increasing as
indicated by a BCB input.

No control action taken.

Lamp Failure One or more lamps have failed in
the bank.

No control action taken.

Lamp Lifetime Exceeded One or more of the lamps in the
bank have exceeded the lamp
lifetime setpoint.

No control action taken.

Lamp Driver Communication
Failure
Indicates a communication failure
between the BCB and lamp
driver(s).

No control action taken.

Lamp Driver Failure Indicates a lamp driver(s) has failed in the bank.

Bank is flagged as unhealthy.

Another bank will be brought online
if possible.

UVI Sensor Fault – Non SBC The 4-20mA signal from the bank UVI sensor is below 2mA or above

20.5mA. Only applies if the
operator configurable “Use
Theoretical” setting is “Always” or
“On Failure”.

No control action taken.

UVI Sensor Lower Than Expected
– Non SBC
The UVI sensor is reading lower
than the theoretical limit value.

No control action taken
UVI Sensor Reference Check
Required
The UVI Sensor Reference Check
Required timer has expired; a
reference check of the bank UVI
sensor(s) is required to maintain
system performance.

No control action taken - Human
intervention is required to perform a
UVI sensor reference check.

UVI Sensor Reference Check
Active
A UVI Sensor Reference Check is
currently being performed on the
bank.

Remote wiping disabled for the
associated wiper group.

Wiper Not In Remote Wiper Group is not set to “Remote”
at the HSC.

No control action taken.

Wiper Position Unknown The wiper has lost its “Home”
position due to a Wiper Group
Jammed or Wiper Retract Travel
Time Exceeded Fault. (Latched)
The affected wiper group is
disabled until condition reset at
HSC.

Lift Attempted With Lamps
Energized
Lifting the banks was attempted
while the lamps were still
energized.

No control action taken.

Page 1288 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 9 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
Security
The SCC controller will be configured with security access restrictions according to the three (3) different access levels defined in the table below.

Level User Description of Access User Name
1 No Login***
(Default)
User may view all unrestricted data. - - -
2 Operator User may view all unrestricted data and enter process data, control process equipment and adjust process
control setpoints. The password protection can be
removed by placing the “Operator Login Required”
System Setting to “No”.

OP
3 Maintenance User has access to configuration of process control strategies and displays
OP1
*** The Login button will show “LOGIN” when there are no users logged in.

3. BANK CONTROL
Control Architecture
The control system architecture has been designed such that each bank in the system will be controlled by a separate Bank Control Board (BCB). Each bank consists of an array of lamp drivers that monitor and control up to two (2) UV lamps each. Lamp drivers are connected through a Modbus RS-485 communication link to the Bank’s BCB, which generates the necessary signals to control the lamp drivers. Lamp and lamp driver status information is passed back to the BCB. The SCC Controller does not communicate directly with the lamps or lamp drivers, but will route desired bank commands to the associated BCB.

All BCB’s communicate with the SCC to accept commands and exchange status information related to its associated bank. Additionally, the BCB has four critical alarms which will shut down a bank:
“Bank Not In Place”
A “Bank Not In Place” alarm is generated when a bank is not in place in the channel. The alarm input is wired directly to the contactor of the respective bank; the BCB will also override all lamps under its control to an off state immediately. A “Bank Not in Place” alarm will also disable the automatic wiping functionality of the affected bank.
“PDC High Temperature Shutdown”
A “PDC High Temperature Shutdown” alarm is generated when the internal temperature of the PDC exceeds the high limit. This alarm input is wired directly to the BCB of the respective bank (one BCB per bank); the BCB will override all lamps under its control to an off state immediately. “Bank Low Water Level”
A “Low Water Level” alarm is generated when the water level in a channel is below the fixed level sensor. The signal from this sensor is connected to the BCB “Low Water Level” discrete input of each bank in the channel as a “Bank Low Water Level” for local protection of the bank.

Page 1289 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 10 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary

“Bank PDC Disconnect OFF”
A “Bank PDC Disconnect OFF” alarm is generated when the corresponding Bank’s disconnect feedback contacts transitions from closed to open circuit. The disconnect feedback is directly connected to the respective Bank’s BCB. The BCB will override all lamps under its control to an off state immediately.

Bank Control Mode Selection
The UVSigna banks can be operated in “Local Off”, “Local On” or “Remote” Control Modes. The selection of “Local Off”, “Local On” or “Remote” Mode is made through a 3-way selector switch mounted on the associated PDC, which is wired to the BCB. When a bank is in “Local Off” Mode, all lamp drivers are de-energized. When a bank is in “Local On” Mode, the BCB will energize the bank at full power. When a bank is in the “Remote” Mode, the SCC is in control of the bank. There are three Bank Remote Modes of Operation: “Off”, “On” and “Auto”.

Bank Control Mode Operation
There are five possible operational modes that a bank can be placed into: “Local On”, “Local Off”, “Remote Off”, “Remote On” and “Remote Auto”. When a bank is in “Local” Mode (“Local On” or “Local Off”), the SCC has no control over the bank. When a bank is in “Remote” Mode, the SCC is responsible for controlling the bank.
“Local Off”
When a bank is placed into “Local Off”, the bank will be commanded to turn off immediately if it was running. The bank will remain off while in this mode of operation. “Local On”
When a bank is placed into “Local On”, the bank will operate at 100% power level. “Remote Off”
When a bank is placed into “Remote Off”, the bank will be commanded to turn off immediately if it was running. A warning screen will prompt the user for confirmation. The bank will remain off while in this mode of operation.
“Remote On”
When a bank is placed into “Remote On”, the bank will operate at 100% power level. “Remote Auto”
A bank in “Remote Auto” is controlled by the Auto Pacing routine. The SCC will control the number of banks that are operating and the BCB will determine the power level the bank must operate at to meet the Target Dose.

In “Remote Auto” Mode, all banks are requested to turn on for a configured warm-up time, and then will change to the power level that is requested by the Auto Pacing routine within the BCB once the warm-up timers expire. Additionally, all banks running in “Remote Auto” Mode in a channel will be forced to full power any time any additional bank within the channel is in a warm-up phase. When a bank is no longer required by the Auto Pacing routine, the bank will remain running at a minimum

Page 1290 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 11 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
power level until a configured Bank Time-Off period expires. The Auto Pacing routine is further described in Section 8 Auto Pacing.

The following table summarizes the available bank control modes:

Bank Mode BCB Power Level Control Power Level
Local Off BCB Off
Local On BCB 100%
Remote Off SCC Off
Remote On SCC 100%
Remote Auto SCC Off or 30% - 100% Auto Pacing Routine Set As a bank operates, each BCB will record the Bank Hours, Bank Cycles, Bank Lamp Hours, and Individual Lamp Hours. An operator can reset/override the Bank Cycles, Bank Lamp Hours, and Individual Lamp Hours from the Operator Interface. When an operator resets/overrides the Bank Lamp Hours all Individual Lamp Hours are automatically set.

Bank Fault System Control Behavior
Banks are subject to a number of fault conditions which may be a minor priority and identify a service requirement, may be major priority and result in a bank either being shut down when in “Remote Auto” Mode or run at full power as required, or may be critical and prevent the bank from running in any mode. All alarms are subject to a minor, major, critical or individually configured alarm delay timers. Refer Section 2.04 System Fault Conditions for more information.

4. HYDRAULIC CONTROL
Control Architecture
Each Hydraulic System Center (HSC) is able to control the hydraulic operations for up to four (4) banks in the system; the banks controlled by the same HSC must be in the same channel. Additional HSC units will be provided as required to control additional banks in the channel. The SCC will communicate to each HSC in the channel separately at unique configured addresses. The hydraulic operations for each bank include:
• Wiping Control – one wiper group per bank
• Bank Lifting Control
The HSC contains a controller which is used to monitor the hydraulic operation related inputs and to control the wiping and bank lifting functionality of each bank. The SCC Controller communicates with each HSC Controller using a Modbus RS-485 network. Through this network, the SCC Controller is able to send commands and configuration settings to HSC, and read HSC and Wiper Group status.

HSC Lift Control
In addition to controlling the wiping operations, each HSC also controls the bank lifting operation. Bank lifting uses the existing hydraulic pump from the wiping system to hydraulically lift banks in and out of a channel, one at a time. Since the same pump is used for both lifting and wiping operation, the HSC can only perform one operation at a time. The HSC has a two-position selector switch used to select HSC “Lift” or “Wiping” Mode. While the HSC is in “Lift” Mode, no wiping will be permitted for any of the wiper groups controlled by the HSC. If the HSC Mode is changed from “Wiping” to “Lift” while a wiping operation is taking place, a lift request will not be completed until the wiping in progress is completed.

Page 1291 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 12 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
Wiping Control Modes
If Wiping Control is enabled, each bank in the system will have a separate wiper group assigned to it. Each wiper group can be set to “Local Off”, “Local On” or “Remote” Control Modes. The mode selection is made through a 3-way selector switch mounted on the HSC, which is wired to discrete inputs of the HSC Controller.

Wiper Group “Local Off” Mode
When a Wiper Group Control Mode is set to “Local Off” the wiper will be inhibited from wiping.

Wiper Group “Local On” Mode
When a Wiper Group Control Mode is set to “Local On”, the wiper group will wipe based on local commands made through the Wiper Operation Selection Switch: “Extend”, “Retract” or “Sequence”. If more than one wiper group in a HSC is placed into “Local On” Mode, only the first wiper group placed into “Local On” will begin to operate - all other wiper groups set to “Local On” will be ignored. The HSC is only capable of wiping one group at a time. When the HSC Wiper Operation Selection Switch is switched to “Local Retract”, a wiper retract sequence will occur and then the hydraulic system will be shut down. When the HSC Wiper Operation Selection Switch is switched to “Local Extend”, a wiper extend sequence will occur and then the hydraulic system will be shut down. When the HSC Wiper Operation Selection Switch is switched to “Local Sequence”, a wiper extend sequence will occur, followed immediately by a wiper retract sequence and then the hydraulic system will be shut down.

Wiper Group “Remote” Mode
When a wiper group is in “Remote” a wipe sequence may be initiated by an operator through the Operator Interface (Manual Wipe Request), or initiated by the HSC based on an operator selectable elapsed time basis (Automatic Wipe Request). The SCC Controller can request a remote wipe of a bank when the measured UV Intensity is lower than expected (negative deviation) in an attempt to rectify possible lamp and UVI sleeve fouling.

Manual Remote Wipe Request – Single Wiper Group
Through the “Wiper Detail” Screen on the Operator Interface, the operator can request a manual remote wipe sequence of a single wiper group in “Remote” Mode. Only one wiper group can be wiped at a time. As a result, if any wiper group in a HSC is currently wiping, the Manual Remote Wipe Request is not available to the operator for all wiper groups in that HSC.

Manual Remote Wipe Request – All Wiper Groups
Through the “Wiper Overview” Screen on the Operator Interface, the operator can request a manual remote wipe sequence of all wiper groups in the system in “Remote” Mode. The HSC will co-ordinate the order in which wiper groups controlled by the same HSC are wiped, one at a time.

The SCC Controller will inhibit a Manual Wipe Request of all Wiper Groups if the HSC is inhibited from Remote Wiping, or all wiper groups in each HSC are inhibited from Remote Wiping.

Automatic Wipe Request
All Wiper Groups in “Remote” Mode in a HSC will be scheduled by the HSC for an automatic wipe when the “Wiper Cycle Time Delay” has elapsed. This time delay is an operator enterable System Setting from the Operator Interface sent to each HSC – if this value is set to 0 the Automatic Wiper functionality is disabled.

Page 1292 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 13 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
For each HSC in the system, when the “Wiper Cycle Time Delay” has elapsed in the HSC Controller, a wipe sequence will be scheduled for all configured wiper groups in “Remote” Mode in the HSC. The HSC will control the order in which the wiper groups will be wiped, one at a time. Once the automatic wipe has been completed, the “Wiper Cycle Time Delay” will be reset.

Controller Remote Wipe Request
The SCC Controller can request a remote wipe of the bank. When the measured UV Intensity is lower than expected (UV Intensity negative deviation), the SCC Controller will request a remote wipe of the bank in an attempt to rectify any possible sleeve fouling.

If the negative deviation still exists after the bank has been wiped, or the SCC Controller is inhibited from requesting a remote wipe of the bank, a “UVI Sensor Lower Than Expected Fault” will be initiated.

The following table further summarizes the available control modes:

Mode Action Initiated By Wiper Action
Wiping - Local Off HSC Off
Wiping - Local Extend HSC Initiate extend sequence
Wiping - Local Retract HSC Initiate retract sequence
Wiping - Local Sequence HSC Initiate extend and then retract sequence Wiping - Remote Auto
HSC Automatic sequence initiated for all enabled wiper groups SCC Operator Interface initiated Manual Remote Wipe sequences of a single wiper group or of all wiper groups in the system SCC Controller initiated Remote Wipe sequence for UVI negative deviation
Bank Lifting HSC Wiper operations in progress are completed, and then wiping is inhibited.

Hydraulic System Fault System Control Behavior
Wipers and the lifting mechanism are subject to a number of fault conditions, which may be critical in nature and result in a HSC being shut off. Some wiper fault conditions - whether they are critical, major, or minor - must be reset by placing all wiper groups of the HSC into “Local Off” mode. All alarms are subject to a minor, major or critical alarm delay timers. Refer to Section 2.04 System Fault Conditions for more information.

Page 1293 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 14 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary

5. FLOW INPUT
A flow signal or flow value over SCADA is required for the Auto Pacing functionality in the UVSigna System.

UVSigna will use one flow signal input or flow value over SCADA for control and assume that the flow is split evenly between active channels, and assumes that all of the flow allocated to a channel will pass through all banks in that channel. Flow can be displayed in m3/hour, m3/day, GPM, L/s and US MGD units as standard options.

Flow Measurement Modes
Analog Flow Signal
A 4-20mA analog flow signal is brought in through the SCC Controller analog input card and scaled to a configurable engineering units range. The raw signal counts are passed through a signal scaling routine to convert to the configured engineering units value, and then passed through a debouncing filter routine. If an analog flow meter fault occurs, the system flow will be set to the “Default” Flow System Setting. An operator may adjust the “Default” Flow value at any time through the System Settings screen of the Operator Interface.

The operator can manually override the flow from the System Overview screen of the Operator Interface. A minor alarm will be posted to indicate that the flow meter override value is being used.

Flow Fault System Control Behavior
Depending on channel flow conditions and/or flow meter status a critical or major alarm could be generated resulting in the system running at full capacity for disinfection. All alarms are subject to a minor, major, critical or individually configured alarm delay timers. A fault with an individually configured alarm delay timer could result in banks timing off under certain configurable conditions. Refer to Section 2.04 System Fault Conditions for more information.

6. UVT INPUT SIGNAL
A UVT signal is required for the UVSigna Auto Pacing functionality. UVSigna will use one UVT signal input for control and assume that the effluent flow through all operating banks is at the same UVT value. UVT is displayed as a percentage (%).

UVT Measurement Modes
Manual UVT Entry
The operator manually sets the system UVT value from the System Overview screen on the Operator Interface. The UVT meter override value option is disabled, as the system UVT is already manually set.

UVT Fault System Control Behavior
UVT faults may be major in nature resulting in the system running at full capacity for disinfection or minor with no control action taken. Refer to Section 2.04 System Fault Conditions for more information.

Page 1294 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 15 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary

7. INTENSITY INPUT SIGNAL
A UV Intensity signal is provided for each UV bank. This signal originates from a 4-20 mA sensor probe mounted within a bank of lamps, and is terminated at the BCB.

Intensity Measurement Modes
Measured Intensity is required for dose calculations. The UV Intensity value is calculated at the BCB using the 4-20mA UVI signal, and is made available to the SCC Controller as a raw mA value and as a scaled value in mW/cm2. The UVI sensor value is continuously compared against a theoretical value determined from the UVI sensor equation associated with the selected dose calculation method. The resulting Sensor Deviation percentage is used by the BCB to determine whether the sensor is currently reading lower than expected and is compared to configured Alarm Setpoints for alarm and warning indications.

A reference sensor check procedure can be initiated by the operator through the Operator Interface; this procedure will step through the process of checking the output of a UV Intensity sensor against a calibrated sensor.

Intensity Fault System Behavior
Intensity faults may be major in nature resulting in the affected bank being flagged as unhealthy and remote wipe request by the controller to be inhibited. Depending on the minor fault condition remote wipe requests can also be inhibited by the controller; other minor fault conditions result in no control action taken. Refer to Section

2.04 System Fault Conditions for more information.

NOTE: The UVI value on the Bank Screen will display a “>” symbol if the UVI Deviation value is more than the Positive Deviation % value that is hard coded in the SCC Controller at 20%. For dose pacing purposes, the BCB will clamp the UVI reading at 1.2x the expected UVI value that is constantly calculated. The S/S0 ratio that is calculated will also be clamped at a maximum value of 1.0 by the BCB.

8. AUTO PACING
Auto Pacing consists of Equipment Pacing and Dose Pacing and applies to banks in “Remote Auto” mode.

Equipment Pacing is executed by the SCC Controller, and will determine the number of UV channels and banks required to achieve the System Target RED at design conditions.

Dose Pacing is completed by each BCB in the UV System. The BCB will independently determine the bank power required to meet the Bank RED Target set by the SCC Controller.

Both of these pacing operations are covered in the sections below.

Equipment Pacing (SCC Controller)
Control Architecture
The UVSigna control system will allow the staging of banks in individual channels as required. In addition, the system can control a single upstream channel isolation inlet gate per channel. If the channel isolation devices cannot be monitored by the SCC Controller, a channel can be “Enabled” or ”Disabled” from the Operator Interface to allow operators to indicate when a channel is required to disinfect process flow. It is assumed that in multi-channel systems the flow through each channel is to be split equally between all open channels, and the flow through each bank in a channel is to be equal.

Each channel is equipped with a separate channel low water level sensor. The signal from this sensor is connected to the BCB Low Water Level discrete input of each bank in the channel. The Low Water

Page 1295 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 16 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
Level status for each channel is provided to the SCC Controller through the Modbus RS-485 communications protocol between the SCC Controller and the BCBs. The SCC Controller uses this status for alarming as well as control of the banks when under SCC control (Remote Mode). The Low Water Level discrete inputs at the BCBs provide local protection of the bank when in “Remote” or “Local” Mode.

Not Enough Healthy Channels (NEHC)
If the number of healthy channels is less than the number of channels required, a “Not Enough Healthy Channels” (NEHC) alarm is latched for the system. When this alarm is active, all channels in the system will be opened, and all banks in all channels will be run at full power including any banks previously shut down for lamp or lamp driver faults. It is possible in this condition for some banks to remain off due to:
• Bank(s) not in “Remote Auto” Mode
• “Bank Not In Place” Fault
• “PDC High Temperature Shutdown” Fault
• SCC to BCB Communication Fault
• Low Water Level Shutdown Faults
Channel Maintenance Mode
Each channel has the ability to be put into maintenance mode. In this mode, no auto pacing will occur and the equipment in the channel will not run regardless of the presence of flow. The relative channel and bank alarms to SCADA will be masked except for the Maintenance Mode alarm. All equipment can be run individually either in manual or in local.

Bank Control Operation
The Bank Control Operation of the Equipment Pacing routine is used to control the number of UV banks that are operating in each channel, and the RED Target for each bank. Banks are assigned a Lead/Lag status by the SCC Controller. This will be updated every time a bank priority sort occurs.

Lag banks are brought in and out of operation by the Equipment Pacing routine as required.

Number of Banks Required
The Bank Control Operation of the Equipment Pacing routine will determine how many banks are required based upon a Bank Dose Capacity – the maximum dose that a bank can achieve based on a predicted flow, current system parameters and System Settings. Each channel will separately calculate the number of banks required based on the Bank Dose Capacities of the available banks in the channel. The number of banks required in each channel can vary. Each “Remote Auto” bank in a channel will run at the necessary power level to achieve the Bank RED Target. The power level for each bank can be different (dependent on factors such as UV Intensity and lamp failures). The bank power level can be modulated between 30% and 100% power.

Bank Turning On
If the required number of banks is greater than the current number of banks operating, a lag bank will be immediately called to operate. When the Equipment Pacing routine determines that more banks are required to be started, the request is processed immediately by the bank control routine. If a lag bank is required to be energized, its bank control routine will energize the lamps in the bank and execute the bank warm-up routine. During this time, all operating banks in “Remote Auto” in the channel will also be held at full power. Once all banks are warmed up in the channel, they will go to the power level assigned by the BCB Dose Pacing routine (based on the Bank RED Target set by

Page 1296 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 17 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
the Equipment Pacing routine). Banks will not be included in the dose calculations until their warmup is complete.

Bank Turning Off
If the required number of banks is less than the current number of banks operating, a lag bank will be called to shut down. The bank control routine will initiate a Bank Time-Off timer (typically 15 to 30 minutes). While a bank is timing-off, it will run at the minimum operating power level (30%) for the duration of the Bank Time-Off Delay. Once the Bank Time-Off timer expires, the bank will be shut off.

If the bank is required for Equipment Pacing during the Bank Time-Off delay time, the bank will exit the time-off sequence, reset the Bank Time-Off timer and begin to Auto Pace once again. The Bank Time-Off timer serves to minimize the number of bank on/off cycles due to fluctuating process conditions.

Priority and Availability
The order in which banks are called to run is determined by the priority and availability of the banks.

Priority: Each bank in a channel is assigned a unique priority used to determine the order in which banks will be called to run or turned off.

Availability: The availability of each bank is dependent on the Bank Mode and Bank Health.

The Equipment Pacing routine will try to run the “Number of Banks Required”, starting with the highest priority bank (Lead) first. If the Lead Bank is not available, then the routine will try to run the next priority bank (1st Lag). This continues until the routine either finds enough available banks to run or there are not enough available banks and a channel fault (“Not Enough Healthy Banks”) is generated.

If a bank running in “Remote Auto” Mode (controlled by Auto Pacing) becomes unavailable, another bank will be requested to run in its place. If another bank is not available to run, a channel fault (“Not Enough Healthy Banks”) is generated.

Not Enough Healthy Banks (NEHB)
If the number of banks required to meet the required System RED are not available in the channel, a channel “Not Enough Healthy Banks” (NEHB) alarm will be generated. This alarm will cause all available “Remote Auto” banks in the channel to be turned on and run at 100% power until another healthy channel can be brought on-line (if available), or the fault is cleared. The fault will be cleared once the number of banks required to run in the channel to meet the required System RED is less than or equal to the number of healthy banks in the channel.

Banks that are in “Remote Off” Mode or banks that have an “Inoperable Alarm” will remain off, while banks that are in “Remote On” Mode will continue to run in “Remote On” Mode at 100% power level.

Lead/Lag Priority Sort
In order to maintain even wear on all equipment, UVSigna has functionality designed to automatically sort the priority of the channels and banks within channels.

Channel priority sort is based on an Automatic Sort Timer set by the operator at the Operator Interface.

The expiration of this timer will initiate a Channel Sort. The order of priority of the channels in the system is assigned based on the sum of the runtime hours of all banks in each channel. The highest priority channel will be the channel with the lowest runtime hours.

Page 1297 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 18 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
An operator can override the automatic sort logic at any time and assign a specific priority to each channel by changing to a Manual Channel Priority Mode. No automatic sorting will occur.

Bank priority is continuously evaluated and sorted. The order of priority of the banks in a channel is determined based on bank lamp hours, bank mode, and bank health. Banks that are faulted, not in auto, and have high lamp hours will have the lowest priority. Healthy banks in remote auto with low lamp hours will have the highest priority. Sorting based on bank lamp hours will only occur if the hours difference between two banks is greater than the entered Bank Sort Hours Difference.

An operator can override the automatic sort logic at any time and assign a specific priority to each bank by changing to a Manual Bank Priority Mode. No automatic sorting will occur.

Dose Pacing
The Dose Pacing routine in the BCB is used to control the bank operating power level to meet or exceed the Bank RED Target set by the SCC Controller. All lamps operating in a UV bank will operate at the same power level and are modulated between 30% and 100% power by the Dose Pacing routine.

Dose Calculation
Each bank in the system independently calculates the RED (in mJ/cm2) it is delivering based on:
• Flow through the bank
• Input UVT signal (or manually entered value)
• Microbe Sensitivity (D10)
• Number of lamps configured
• Number of lamps in operation (account for faults, etc.) • Bank Power Level
• Number of banks on in the channel
When the Dose Pacing routine determines that a bank must increase or decrease its power, the power is staged to allow the UV Intensity sensor reading to respond to the change in bank power.

The RED delivered by each channel is determined by summing the calculated RED of each bank in the channel currently running, regardless of their operational status (“Local On”, “Remote Auto”, “Remote On”, “Warming” or “Timing-Off”).

The System RED is set to the lowest calculated channel RED of all channels with flow present. If the System RED value falls below the Target RED value, a Low UV Dose alarm condition is set.

Auto Pacing Fault System Control Behavior
Auto Pacing faults may be critical in nature resulting in a channel to be flagged as unhealthy. A major fault will result in the system to run at full capacity for disinfection. Refer to Section 2.04 System Fault Conditions for more information.

9. POWER FAILURE DETECTION
Power Failure at SCC
When a power failure occurs at the SCC controller, the SCC Controller control program will detect that it is running its first pass of the program. When this occurs, the control logic returns the system to normal operation as it was before the power failure occurred. When the SCC is in a power failure state, BCBs that are in “Remote

Page 1298 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 19 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
Auto” Mode will operate in accordance with the “Communication Failure Action” System Setting: “Stay Same” or “Turn On”. When the system is configured for “Stay Same” operation, if a bank in “Remote Auto” was running when communications was lost with the SCC, the BCB will run the bank at full power. Otherwise, if the bank in “Remote Auto” was off when communications was lost with the SCC, the bank will remain off. Alternatively, if the system is configured for “Turn On” operation, a bank in “Remote Auto” will be run at full power by the BCB when communications is lost with the SCC.

Power Failure Detected by BCB
When a power failure occurs at the BCB for a sufficient duration, the BCB that experiences the power failure will set a Power on Reset bit for five (5) minutes.

Power Failure Fault System Control Behavior
Power failure faults may be critical or minor in nature resulting in no control action to be taken. When a “System Power on Reset” alarm occurs the controller will maintain normal operation as it was prior to the power outage.

Refer to Section 2.04 System Fault Conditions for more information.

10. SYSTEM TRENDING
The Operator Interface will store trended data in files that are accessible for file transfer while the UV system is in operation (either through removable media or file transfer). The data files can be imported into Excel for diagnostic purposes. All data trended will be sampled on a change in data, with a maximum sampling rate of 1 minute, and stored to a data log file. A maximum of 1,000,000 data points is available for storing data history, providing over 60 days of data history. The following data points will be trended:
• Current System Flow
• Current UVT
• Reduction Equivalent Dose (RED)
A Trend window on the Operator Interface will be configured to display Flow, UVT and RED on the same screen.

The Trend window will be configured with a moving 8 hour timescale and will display Flow, UVT and RED as engineering units.

Page 1299 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 20 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary

11. PLANT SCADA INTERFACE
Plant SCADA Interface Architecture
The SCC Controller will act as a slave node only and will not initiate any communication messaging or data transfers, but will respond to polling messages on the required network address. SCADA information will be available in a selection of contiguous 16-bit integer addresses as defined in the data table shown in the following sections. A minimal amount of data will also be able to be transferred from a SCADA system to the SCC Controller.

SCADA interface protocols that are available as standard options are listed in the specific Control Software specification documents for individual Controller platforms.

Plant SCADA Addressing Summary
Description Tag Name Number of
Words Direction
System Control N_SCADA_CTRL 7 From SCADA to UV System
System Status N_SCADA_SYS 11 To SCADA from UV System
Channel 1 Status N_SCADA_CH1[0] 10 To SCADA from UV System Channel 1 Bank A Status N_SCADA_CH1[10] 10 To SCADA from UV System Channel 1 Bank B Status N_SCADA_CH1[20] 10 To SCADA from UV System Channel 1 Bank C Status N_SCADA_CH1[30] 10 To SCADA from UV System Channel 2 Status N_SCADA_CH2[0] 10 To SCADA from UV System Channel 2 Bank A Status N_SCADA_CH2[10] 10 To SCADA from UV System Channel 2 Bank B Status N_SCADA_CH2[20] 10 To SCADA from UV System Channel 2 Bank C Status N_SCADA_CH2[30] 10 To SCADA from UV System Plant SCADA Interface Read Data
The following data will be available to be read from the SCC Controller by the Plant SCADA:

MAPPED ADDRESS TAG DESCRIPTION UNITS

SYSTEM DATA
N_SCADA_SYS[0].0 Common minor alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[0].1 Common major alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[0].2 Common critical alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[0].3 Common HSC alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[0].4 Watchdog pulse 2s On then 2s Off
N_SCADA_SYS[1].0 SCC run on UPS 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[2].0 Low UV dose alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[2].1 Not enough healthy channels 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[2].3 Low UVT - out of validation range 1 = Fault N_SCADA_SYS[2].4 Flow meter fault 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[2].5 High flow - out of validation range 1 = Fault N_SCADA_SYS[2].6 Low flow alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[2].7 SCC Controller fault 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[3].0 SCC Controller low battery 1 = Fault

Page 1300 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 21 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary

MAPPED ADDRESS TAG DESCRIPTION UNITS
N_SCADA_SYS[3].1 System power on reset 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[3].2 SCC power restored 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[3].3 UPS fault 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[3].4 SCADA fault detected 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[3].5 System in transition 1 = In Transition N_SCADA_SYS[3].6 UVT below design value 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[3].7 Low UVT alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_SYS[3].8 UVT meter override value used 1 = Fault N_SCADA_SYS[3].9 High UVT – out of validation range 1 = Fault N_SCADA_SYS[3].10 Flow meter override value used 1 = Fault N_SCADA_SYS[3].11 Low flow – out of validation range 1 = Fault N_SCADA_SYS[4] System flow
Flow Units
x Flow Scaling Factor
N_SCADA_SYS[5] Calculated system UV dose mJ/cm2 x100
N_SCADA_SYS[6] UV transmittance % x10
N_SCADA_SYS[7] Flow Scaling Factor
1=1
2=10
3=100
4=0.1
5=0.01
CHANNEL 1 - GENERAL DATA
N_SCADA_CH1[0].0 CH 1 minor alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[0].1 CH 1 major alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[0].2 CH 1 critical alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[0].3 CH 1 HSC alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[0].4 CH 1 in operation 1 = In Operation
N_SCADA_CH1[0].5 CH 1 low water level condition 1 = Low Water N_SCADA_CH1[0].8 CH 1 Offline Mode enabled 1 = Offline Enabled N_SCADA_CH1[1].1 CH 1 not enough healthy banks 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[1].3 CH 1 design flow exceeded 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[1].4 CH 1 maximum flow velocity exceeded 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[1].5 CH 1 flow limit for wiping exceeded 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[1].15 CH 1 maintenance mode enabled 1 = Enabled N_SCADA_CH1[3].0 HSC 1 hydraulic tank low level 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[3].1 HSC 1 pump fault 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[3].2 HSC 1 - SCC communication fault 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[3].3 HSC 1 remote wipe inhibited 1 = Inhibited CHANNEL 1 - BANK DATA
N_SCADA_CH1[10].0 Bank 1A minor alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[10].1 Bank 1A major alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[10].2 Bank 1A critical alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[10].3 Bank 1A HSC alarm 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[10].4 Bank 1A in operation 1 = Operating
N_SCADA_CH1[11].0 Bank 1A wiper jammed 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[11].1 Bank 1A wiper travel time exceeded 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[11].2 Bank 1A wiper not in remote 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[11].3 Bank 1A wiper unknown position 1 = Fault

Page 1301 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 22 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary

MAPPED ADDRESS TAG DESCRIPTION UNITS
N_SCADA_CH1[11].4 Bank 1A lift attempted with lamps energized 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[12].0 Bank 1A PDC high temp shutdown 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[12].1 Bank 1A not in place 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[12].2 Bank 1A low water level shutdown 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[12].3 Bank 1A PDC disconnect off 1 = Off
N_SCADA_CH1[12].4 Bank 1A SCC-PDC comm fault 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[12].5 Bank 1A multi lamp failure 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[12].6 Bank 1A configuration mismatch 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[12].7 Bank 1A not enough healthy lamps 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[12].8 Bank 1A UVI sensor faulted - SBC 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[12].9 Bank 1A UVI lower than expected 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[12].10 Bank 1A BCB DIPSwitch mismatch 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[13].1 Bank 1A not in remote auto 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[13].2 Bank 1A low level warning 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[13].3 Bank 1A PDC fan failure 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[13].5 Bank 1A PDC high temperature warning 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[13].6 Bank 1A lamp failure 1 = Fault
N_SCADA_CH1[13].7 Bank 1A lamp lifetime exceeded 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[13].8 Bank 1A lamp driver failure 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[13].9 Bank 1A lamp driver comm failure 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[13].10 Bank 1A lamp disabled 1 = Disabled
N_SCADA_CH1[13].11 Bank 1A UVI sensor faulted - Non SBC 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[13].12 Bank 1A UVI lower than expected warning 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[13].13 Bank 1A UVI reference check required 1 = Fault N_SCADA_CH1[13].14 Bank 1A UVI reference check active 1 = Active N_SCADA_CH1[14] Bank 1A lamp hours Hours
N_SCADA_CH1[15] Bank 1A lamp power Power (%)
N_SCADA_CH1[16] Bank 1A UVI mW/cm2 x1000
SCADA Interface Write Data
The following data will be available to be written from the Plant SCADA system to the SCC Controller:

Tag Name Description Units
N_SCADA_CTRL[0] UV system total flow Flow Units
x Flow Scaling Factor
N_SCADA_CTRL[5].1 SCADA heartbeat signal 2s On then 2s Off SCADA Fault Conditions
A SCADA fault is minor in nature and depending on configuration settings the “Default” flow will be used. Refer to 2.04 System Fault Conditions for more information.

Page 1302 of 1513 ends

810206

CONTROLS PHILOSOPHY (CP)
Rev 1.1 Page 23 of 23 Oct 31, 2022

TROJAN UVSIGNATM
Confidential - Company Proprietary
Revision History
Rev Description Revision By Approved By Date

1.0 For Submittal Approval MEC JLT Dec 21, 2021

1.1 Added UPS as per build sheet rev B MEC PT Nov 7, 2022

Page 1303 of 1513 ends
Page 1304 of 1513 ends

Calculations & Certifications
Water
Confidence™

CALCULATIONS
& CERTIFICATIONS

SECTION CONTENTS
Calculations
TrojanUVSigna™ Headloss Calculation
TrojanUVSigna™ Dose Calculation
Certifications
TrojanUVSigna™ Validation Test Certification
TrojanUVSolo™ Lamp 1000W PSS Measurement
TrojanUVSolo™ End of Lamp Life Factor Letter
TrojanUVSolo™ Fouling Factor Letter

Page 1305 of 1513 ends

Water
Confidence™
Calculations & Certifications
Calculations & Certifications

Page 1306 of 1513 ends

TROJANUVSIGNA™ HEADLOSS CALCULATIONS -

CONFIDENTIAL
El Centro, CA

HYDRAULIC INFORMATION
The TrojanUVSignaTM has undergone third-party validation with Carollo Engineers. As part of this validation, headloss testing was conducted over a range of flows and characterized in the equation form presented below.

𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐶𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = (𝐴𝐴𝑄𝑄2 + 𝐵𝐵 + 𝐶𝐶) 𝑥𝑥 𝐵𝐵 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (Equation 1)
Where:

HeadlossChannel = UV system (UV banks only) head loss per channel (inches) Q = flow per lamp per bank, calculated as the total flow divided by the number of lamps in a single bank, in units of gallons per minute per lamp (gpm/lamp/bank),
Banks = Number of banks per channel,
A,B,C = Model coefficients obtained by fitting the equation to the validation headloss data
For El Centro, CA, the design conditions are:
• Peak Design Flow: 8 MGD(US) per duty channel
And proposed UV system configuration is:
• Number of Channels: 2
• Number of Banks/Channel: 3 Banks per Channel
• Number of Lamps/Bank: 8
To calculate the UV system channel head loss for the configuration of the TrojanUVSigna™ the following should be deteremined per Equation 1.

1. Flowrate per lamp/bank:
16 MGD ÷ 2 Duty Channels = 8 MGD per Channel = 5555.6 GPM per channel.

The flowrate per lamp/bank is therefore:
5555.6 GPM ÷ (8 Lamps/Bank) = 694.45 gpm/lamp per bank

2. Calculate the head loss per UV channel of the system proposed:

From Equation 1:

𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐶𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 1.06 x 3 banks
= 3.19 inches
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 2.90 inches
𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 = 6.09 inches

Page 1307 of 1513 ends
Page 1308 of 1513 ends

TROJANUVSIGNA™ HEADLOSS CALCULATIONS -

CONFIDENTIAL
El Centro, CA

HYDRAULIC INFORMATION
The TrojanUVSignaTM has undergone third-party validation with Carollo Engineers. As part of this validation, headloss testing was conducted over a range of flows and characterized in the equation form presented below.

𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐶𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = (𝐴𝐴𝑄𝑄2 + 𝐵𝐵 + 𝐶𝐶) 𝑥𝑥 𝐵𝐵 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (Equation 1)
Where:

HeadlossChannel = UV system (UV banks only) head loss per channel (inches) Q = flow per lamp per bank, calculated as the total flow divided by the number of lamps in a single bank, in units of gallons per minute per lamp (gpm/lamp/bank),
Banks = Number of banks per channel,
A,B,C = Model coefficients obtained by fitting the equation to the validation headloss data
For El Centro, CA, the design conditions are:
• Peak Design Flow: 24 MGD(US) per duty channel
And proposed UV system configuration is:
• Number of Channels: 2
• Number of Banks/Channel: 3 Banks per Channel
• Number of Lamps/Bank: 8
To calculate the UV system channel head loss for the configuration of the TrojanUVSigna™ the following should be deteremined per Equation 1.

1. Flowrate per lamp/bank:
24 MGD ÷ 2 Duty Channels = 12 MGD per Channel = 8333.33 GPM per channel.

The flowrate per lamp/bank is therefore:
8333.33 GPM ÷ (8 Lamps/Bank) = 1041.67 gpm/lamp per bank

2. Calculate the head loss per UV channel of the system proposed:

From Equation 1:

𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐶𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 2.17 x 3 banks
= 6.51 inches
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 3.80 inches
𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 = 10.31 inches

Page 1309 of 1513 ends
Page 1310 of 1513 ends

TROJANUVSIGNA™ DOSE CALCULATIONS -

CONFIDENTIAL
El Centro, CA

VALIDATED UV SYSTEM SIZING METHODOLOGY
The TrojanUVSignaTM reactor has undergone third-party bioassay validation with Carollo Engineers which confirms the UV dose delivery for system sizing. The validation was conducted in general accordance with the NWRI and USEPA UVDGM protocols. A sensor based control equation is used to monitor real time lamp output (accounts for fouling and lamp aging) for accurate UV dose calculation.

Multiple challenge organisms were used to bracket a range of pathogens with varying UV sensitivities in wastewater. Evaluating UV reactor performance using multiple organisms (i.e. T1 and MS2) leads to a robust UV system design that optimizes energy consumption while ensuring disinfection requirements are met.

The third-party bioassay sizing equation for the TrojanUVSigna was developed in the equation forms presented in Equation 1 and Equation 2.
ሺEquation 1ሻ
𝑅𝐸𝐷 ൌ log𝑖 ൈ 𝐷௅
ሺEquation 2ሻ
Where:
logi = Log inactivation of the challenge microorganisms (MS2 or T1) or other organism with a UV sensitivity (mJ/cm2/log inactivation) between T1 and MS2
RED = Reduction equivalent dose, mJ/cm2
Q/lamp = flow per lamp per bank, calculated as the total flow divided by the number of lamps in a single bank, in units of gallons per minute per lamp (gpm/lamp/bank), UVA = UV light absorbance at 254 nm (per cm); where UVA = -log (UVT/100), S = Duty sensor intensity, mW/cm2
So = Duty sensor intensity at 100% lamp power setting, mW/cm2 DL = UV sensitivity of the challenge microorganism, mJ/cm2/log inactivation A,B,C,D,E, = Model coefficients obtained by fitting the equation to the validation data For El Centro, CA, the design conditions are:
 Peak Design Flow: 8 MGD(US) per duty channel
 Design Dose: 30 mJ/cm² (MS2 RED)
 UV Transmittance: 62%
 End of Lamp Life Adjustment Factor (EOLL): 0.86
 Fouling Factor (FF): 0.94

Page 1311 of 1513 ends

TROJANUVSIGNA™ DOSE CALCULATIONS -

CONFIDENTIAL
El Centro, CA
And proposed UV system configuration is:
 Number of Channels: 2 Duty
 Number of Duty Banks/Channel: 3 Duty Banks per Channel  Number of Lamps/Bank: 8
 Total number of Lamps: 8 Lamps/Bank x 3 Banks/Ch x 1 Channel = Total 24 Lamps To calculate the MS2 RED for the configuration of the TrojanUVSigna™ the following should be deteremined per Equation 1.

1. Total number of duty lamps in the system offered: 24

2. Flowrate per lamp/bank:
16 MGD ÷ 2 Duty Channels = 8 MGD per Channel = 5555.6 GPM per channel.

The flowrate per lamp/bank is therefore:
5555.6 GPM ÷ (8 Lamps/Bank) = 694.45 gpm/lamp per bank

3. ቀ ௌ
ௌ೚
ቁ = For sizing, use 100% Lamp power, and apply EOLL and FF = 1 x 0.86 x 0.94 = 0.81

4. Calculate the MS2 RED dose of the system proposed:

From Equation 1 and Equation 2:

𝑅𝐸𝐷 ൌ 35.8 mJ/cm2

Page 1312 of 1513 ends
Page 1 of 2 ends

2700 Ygnacio Valley Road, Suite 300, Walnut Creek, California 93711 P. 925.932.1710
carollo.com
January 20, 2017
Wayne Lem, P.Eng.

Trojan Technologies
3020 Gore Road
London, ON N5V 4T7
Subject: Validation Test Certification
TrojanUVSignaTM (2-Row) Ultraviolet Disinfection System NWRI 2012 UV Guidelines
Dear Wayne:

This letter certifies that the bioassay validation testing was completed for the TrojanUVSignaTM 2-Row UV disinfection system in September 2016. The testing and data analysis was conducted in accordance with the Ultraviolet Disinfection Guidelines for Drinking Water and Water Reuse (National Water Research Institute [NWRI]/Water Research Foundation, August 2012), hereinafter called the NWRI 2012 UV Guidelines.

All microbiological enumerations were completed by GAP EnviroMicrobial Services Ltd. (London, Ontario, Canada). Carollo witnessed all aspects of the validation, including dimensional verification of the test set up and UV reactor, operational conditions for each test, and sampling. UV sensor responses were also witnessed, as they will be used to develop the sensor based performance equations for the system.

The final validation report, which will be available by January 31, 2017, will document the validated range for the TrojanUVSignaTM 2-Row as well as the Reduction Equivalent Dose (RED) performance equation in accordance with the NWRI 2012 UV Guidelines. A summary of the validated range is presented in Table 1 below.

Page 1313 of 1513 ends
Page 2 of 2 ends

2700 Ygnacio Valley Road, Suite 300, Walnut Creek, California 93711 P. 925.932.1710
carollo.com
Please feel free to distribute this letter to your potential customers.

Regards,
CAROLLO ENGINEERS, INC.

Bill Sotirakos, P.Eng.

Principal UV Technologist
Table 1 Validated Range for Use of the REDMS2 Equation
Flow Rate (1) (US gpm/lamp) UVT (2) (%) Ballast Power Level (%)

99.4 - 1,211 39.7 - 80.0 30 - 100
Notes:
(1) At flow rates below 99.4 US gpm/lamp, this value (99.4 gpm/lamp) should be used as the default value in the RED calculation. The flow rate is calculated by dividing the total flow rate in a channel by the number of lamps in one bank. For this validation testing, one bank was comprised of eight (8) UV lamps. (2) At UVT values above 80.0 percent, this value (80.0 percent UVT, or 0.097 A254) should be used as the default value in the RED calculation.

Page 1314 of 1513 ends

HDR | HydroQual
HDR Engineering, Inc.

Trojan Technologies
3020 Gore Road
London, Ontario
N5V 4T7
Project: Trojan Technologies 908069
To Whom It May Concern:

HDR|HydroQual has verified lamp
amalgam 1000W UV lamps (Part # 908069
had been burned-in for 100 hours and were operated at their full rated electrical inp the test. The measurements were witnessed by
Summation irradiance model, the maximum steady
during testing was 421.2 and 420.1
a UVC lamp efficiency of 42.1% and
__________________________________
Chengyue Shen, Ph.D.

Technical Director of the UV Center
[email protected]
1200 MacArthur Blvd
Mahwah, NJ 07430-2322
January 30, 2013
908069-200 Lamp (1000W) PSS Measurement
has verified lamp-output measurements carried out on two lowUV lamps (Part # 908069-200) manufactured for Trojan Technologies. The lamps in for 100 hours and were operated at their full rated electrical inp the test. The measurements were witnessed by HDR|HydroQual. Using a Point Source Summation irradiance model, the maximum steady-state output that was recorded for each lamp 420.1 Watts at 254 nm. At 1000 Watts input power, this corresponds to % and 42.0%, respectively.
__________________________________
Director of the UV Center
Phone: (201) 529-5151
Fax: (210) 529-5728
www.hdrinc.com
-pressure mercury
manufactured for Trojan Technologies. The lamps
in for 100 hours and were operated at their full rated electrical input power during HydroQual. Using a Point Source
state output that was recorded for each lamp
input power, this corresponds to

Page 1315 of 1513 ends
Page 1316 of 1513 ends

hdrinc.com 1 International Boulevard, 10th Floor, Suite 1000, Mahwah, NJ 07495-0027 (201) 335-9300

END-OF-LAMP-LIFE (EOLL) FACTOR CERTIFICATION
For The
TROJAN TECHNOLOGIES 1KW SOLO G2 LAMP AT 15,000 HOURS
This is to certify that the lifetime performance validation of the Trojan Technologies 1kW Solo G2 lamp (Trojan PN 908069-200) was conducted successfully from January 2013 to June 2015.

The validation was conducted primarily by Trojan employees at the Trojan Lamp Lab in London, ON, Canada, and was witnessed by personnel from Henningson, Durham & Richardson Architecture and Engineering, P.C. (HDR) and GAP EnviroMicrobial Services Ltd. (GAP). The validation was performed in accordance with the Ultraviolet Disinfection Guidelines for Drinking Water and Water Reuse (National Water Research Institute [NWRI]/American Water Works Association Research Foundation [AwwaRF], 2nd edition, May 2003).

HDR provided QA/QC reviews on all generated data and analyzed the data jointly with Trojan. It is concluded that an End-Of-Lamp-Life (EOLL) factor of 0.86 can be assigned to the Trojan Technologies 1kW Solo G2 lamp (Trojan PN 908069-200) at 15,000 hours.

Henningson, Durham & Richardson Architecture and Engineering, P.C.

Date: November 25, 2015
Chengyue Shen, P.E., Ph.D., Manager, HDR Technology Validation Center

Page 1317 of 1513 ends
Page 1318 of 1513 ends

HDR | HydroQual
HDR Engineering, Inc.
1200 MacArthur Blvd
Mahwah, NJ 07430-2322
Phone: (201) 529-5151
Fax: (210) 529-5728
www.hdrinc.com
April 29, 2013
Steve McDermid
Validation and Research Services
Trojan Technologies
3020 Gore Rd.

London, Ontario, Canada N5V 4TV
Re. UV Quartz Sleeve Cleaning System Performance for the TrojanUVSignaTM and TrojanUVSonusTM UV Disinfection Systems
This letter serves to verify that HDR|HydroQual has provided third party witness on the UV lamp sleeve cleaning system performance test conducted by Trojan Technologies at the Greenway Pollution Plant (London, ON, Canada) for the quartz sleeves used in the TrojanUVSignaTM and TrojanUVSonusTM reactors. The test protocol used conformed to the Ultraviolet Disinfection Guidelines for Drinking Water and Water Reuse (National Water Research Institute [NWRI]/American Water Works Association Research Foundation [AwwaRF], May 2003).

HDR|HydroQual has analyzed the associated data comprising of UV lamp sleeve transmittance measurements (at 254 nm), and can verify that the average sleeve fouling factor is 0.94. _________________________________
Chengyue Shen, Ph.D., P.E.

Technical Director of the UV Center
[email protected]

Page 1319 of 1513 ends
Page 1320 of 1513 ends

Water
Confidence™
Warranties

SECTION CONTENTS
Equipment Limited Warranty
Amalgam Lamp Limited Warranty
Lamp Driver Limited Warranty
UV Intensity Limited Warranty
Performance Guarantee
Warranty Claim Form
Lamp Recycling Program & Form

Page 1321 of 1513 ends

Water
Confidence™
Warranties

Page 1322 of 1513 ends

Warranties
Equipment Limited Warranty
December 31, 2021

Page 1 of 1 ends

TrojanUV - A Division of Trojan Technologies Group ULC
3020 Gore Road, London, Ontario, Canada N5V 4T7 T 519.457.3400 F 519.457.3030 www.trojanuv.com Equipment Limited Warranty-810206 El Centro, CA
The following terms and conditions will govern the equipment warranty provided by Trojan Technologies to the Owner/Operator:

Period of Coverage: Trojan Technologies (“Trojan”) warrants to the Owner/Operator noted above (the “Customer”) that if within 24 calendar months from equipment Substantial Completion or 30 calendar months from the date of delivery (the “Warranty Period”), whichever comes first, equipment manufactured by Trojan (the “Equipment”) will be free from defects in material and workmanship and will function in accordance with the specifications agreed to by Trojan for the Equipment. “Substantial Completion” is the date on which the Equipment commissioning and start-up is sufficiently completed such that the Equipment is capable of being put into operation such that the Owner can utilize the Equipment for its intended disinfection use.

Customer must notify Trojan in writing within 5 days of the date of any Equipment failure. This notification shall include a description of the problem, a copy of the operator’s log, a copy of the Customer’s maintenance record and any analytical results detailing the problem. If Customer has not maintained the operator’s log and maintenance record in the manner directed in the Operation and Maintenance manual, or does not notify Trojan of the problem as specified above, this warranty may, in Trojan’s discretion, be invalid.

If a defect occurs, Trojan will, at its option, repair or replace the defective component free of charge, provided that:

1. Customer fully cooperates with Trojan, in the manner requested by Trojan, in attempting to diagnose and resolve the problem by way of telephone support. If the problem can be diagnosed and verified by telephone support and a replacement part is required, Trojan will either ship at Trojan’s expense, a repaired, reworked or new part to the Customer, who will install such part as directed by Trojan, or direct Customer to acquire, at Trojan’s expense, such part from a third party and to install such part as directed by Trojan;

2. In the event that Trojan determines that the problem cannot be resolved by way of telephone support and/or shipment by Trojan, or acquisition by the Customer of a replacement part for installation by the Customer, Trojan will send one or more persons to make an onsite inspection of the problem. If an onsite visit is made, Trojan personnel will evaluate the problem and repair or replace any Equipment determined to be in breach of this warranty. If the problem is not attributable to a breach of this warranty, Trojan reserves the right to invoice the Customer for this service; and

3. The Equipment is covered and the failure occurs within the Warranty Period Trojan will, at its option, use new and/or reconditioned parts in performing warranty repair. Trojan has the right to use parts or products of original or improved design in the repair or replacement.

The products or general components replaced or repaired free of charge under the Equipment Limited Warranty are warranted only for the remaining portion of the original Equipment Limited Warranty Period.

Limitations: This warranty shall not apply to any failure or defect which results from:
• the Equipment not being operated and maintained in strict accordance with instructions specified in the Operation and Maintenance manual or Product Bulletin or which results from mishandling, misuse, neglect, improper storage, improper operation of the Equipment with other equipment furnished by the Customer or by other third parties or from defects in designs or specifications furnished by or on behalf of the Customer by a person other than Trojan.
• Equipment that has been altered or repaired after start-up by anyone except: (a) authorized representatives of Trojan, or (b) Customer acting under specific written instructions from Trojan. • Use of parts not supplied or approved by Trojan
This warranty does not cover:
• Equipment components manufactured by third parties but furnished to Customer by Trojan are warranted by the original manufacturer, only to the extent of the original manufacturer’s warranty • Normal wear and tear of the product
• Consumable components including but not limited to wiper seals, cleaning chemical, batteries • Trojan supplied components that are the subject of a separate warranty • Costs related to removal, installation, or troubleshooting of a component • Physical damage
• Improper installation
• Acts of God, terrorism, biological infestations, or input voltage that create operating conditions beyond the minimum or maximum limits listed in the Operations Manual including high input voltage from generators and lightening strikes • Damage caused by improper return packaging
• Taxes, duties or brokerage fees (if any)
This warranty is the exclusive remedy for all claims based on a failure of or defect in the Equipment, whether the claim is based on contract (including fundamental breach), tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties whether written, oral, implied or statutory. Without limitation, no warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose shall apply to the Equipment.

Trojan does not assume any liability for personal injury or property damage caused by use or misuse of the Equipment. Trojan shall not in any event be liable for special, incidental, indirect or consequential damages including, without limitation, lost profits, lost business opportunities, lost revenue or loss or depreciation of goodwill, even if it has been advised of the possibility thereof. Trojan’s liability shall, in all instances, be limited to repair or replacement of Equipment in breach of this warranty and shall not exceed the cost of such repair or replacement. This liability with respect to repair or replacement will terminate upon the expiration date of this warranty.

In addition to the foregoing, in no event shall Trojan’s liability relating to the Equipment, or the agreement between Trojan and the Customer relating to the Equipment, exceed that portion of the purchase price for the Equipment which is actually paid to Trojan.

Page 1323 of 1513 ends

Water
Confidence™
Warranties

Page 1324 of 1513 ends

Warranties
Amalgam Lamp Limited Warranty
January 1, 2017

Page 1 of 1 ends

TrojanUV - A Division of Trojan Technologies Group ULC
3020 Gore Road, London, Ontario, Canada N5V 4T7 T 519.457.3400 F 519.457.3030 www.trojanuv.com TrojanUV Solo LampTM Limited Warranty
TrojanUVSignaTM
Warranty Coverage:

The following warranty applies to Trojan Technologies Low Pressure Lamps (the “Lamps”) for the TrojanUVSigna. The warranty is only valid with respect to a Lamp that is properly stored, handled and installed as specified in the Operation and Maintenance manual supplied with the system in which the Lamp is installed or as outlined in subsequent Product Bulletins. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, any excess vibration or improper operation of a Lamp shall void this warranty. In addition, Trojan Technologies shall not be liable for any Lamp failure which results from UV equipment not being operated and maintained in strict accordance with the instructions set out in the Operation and Maintenance manual or as outlined in Product Bulletins.

In order to process any Lamp warranty claim, Trojan Technologies requires the Customer to provide a copy of the operator’s log, all maintenance records and a completed Warranty Claim Form within one (1) month of the lamp failure. Failure to meet these terms will void the Lamp warranty.

Trojan Technologies reserves the right to require the Customer to return a failed Lamp to Trojan Technologies’ facilities for inspection.

Failure to return the Lamp when requested shall void the warranty.

Period of Coverage:

When a Lamp has been stored, handled and installed as specified in the Operation and Maintenance manual or as outlined in Product Bulletins, and the relevant UV equipment has been operated and maintained in accordance with instructions specified in the Operation and Maintenance manual, and:

1. The Lamp fails within the first 9,000 hours of operation; Trojan Technologies shall provide the Customer with a replacement Lamp free of charge.

2. The Lamp fails after 9,000 hours and prior to 15,000 hours of operation; Trojan Technologies shall provide the Customer with a replacement Lamp at a discounted price. The following formula is used to determine the discounted price for the replacement Lamp:

Replacement Lamp Price = ((Lamp Operating Hours) / 15,000 x Lamp List Price) Regardless of actual Lamp operating hours, the Lamp warranty is void if the date of Lamp failure occurs more than thirty-six (36) calendar months after the Lamp shipment date from Trojan Technologies.

The above operating conditions of Lamps are based on an average of 4 On/Off cycles, per 24 hour period, accumulated over the total guaranteed life of the Lamp.

Limitations:

This limited warranty does not cover:
 Lamps that have been used with parts not supplied or approved by Trojan Technologies  Lamps that have been physically damaged or fail due to corrosion, exposure to contaminants (e.g. effluent), incorrect installation or operation
 Costs related to troubleshooting, removal, or installation  Damage caused by improper return packaging
 Taxes, duties or brokerage fees (if any)
The above warranty is the exclusive remedy for all claims based on a failure of or defect in a Lamp, whether the claim is based on contract (including fundamental breach), tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties whether written, oral, implied or statutory. Without limitation, no warranty of merchantability or of fitness for a particular purpose shall apply to a Lamp.

Trojan Technologies does not assume any liability for personal injury or property damage caused by use or misuse of a Lamp. Trojan Technologies shall not, in any case, be liable for special, incidental, indirect or consequential damages, even if it has been advised of the possibility thereof. Trojan Technologies’ liability shall not, in any case, exceed the cost of replacement of a defective Lamp.

Page 1325 of 1513 ends

Water
Confidence™
Warranties

Page 1326 of 1513 ends

Warranties
Lamp Driver Limited Warranty
January 1, 2017

Page 1 of 1 ends

TrojanUV - A Division of Trojan Technologies Group ULC
3020 Gore Road, London, Ontario, Canada N5V 4T7 T 519.457.3400 F 519.457.3030 www.trojanuv.com Lamp Driver Limited Warranty
TrojanUVSigna™
Warranty Coverage:

The following warranty applies to the Trojan Technologies Lamp Driver (the “Lamp Driver”) for the Trojan TrojanUVSigna. The warranty is only valid with respect to a new Lamp Driver that is purchased as: (i) a component of a new system, (ii) a spare part shipped with a new system, or (iii) a purchased replacement component, and that is properly stored, handled and installed as specified in the Operation and Maintenance manual supplied with the system in which the Lamp Driver is installed or as outlined in subsequent Product Bulletins. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, any excess vibration or improper operation of the Lamp Driver shall void this warranty. In addition, Trojan Technologies shall not be liable for any Lamp Driver failure which results from UV equipment not being operated and maintained in strict accordance with the instructions set out in the Operation and Maintenance manual or Product Bulletins.

Trojan Technologies reserves the right to require the Customer to return failed Lamp Drivers to Trojan Technologies’ facilities for inspection along with the operator’s log and maintenance records. Failure to return the Lamp Driver or provide logs or records when requested shall void the warranty.

Period Of Coverage:

Where a Lamp Driver has been stored, handled and installed as specified in the Operation and Maintenance manual, and the relevant UV equipment has been operated and maintained in accordance with instructions specified in the Operation and Maintenance manual or Product Bulletin, and:

1. The Lamp Driver fails within one (1) calendar year after the Warranty Start Date, Trojan Technologies shall provide the Customer with a replacement Driver free of charge.

2. The Lamp Driver fails after the first (1st), and before the tenth (10th) anniversary of the Warranty Start Date, Trojan Technologies shall provide the Customer with a replacement Lamp Driver at a discounted price. The following formula is used to determine the discounted price for the replacement Driver:

Replacement Lamp Driver Price = ((Number of Elapsed Months) / 120 x List Price) The “Warranty Start Date” is, in the case of a Lamp Driver forming part of a new system installation or shipped as a spare part with a new system, the commissioning date of the new system. In the case of a Lamp Driver purchased as a replacement component, warranty start date is the shipment date of the Lamp Driver. One “Elapsed Month” shall be deemed to have passed at the beginning of the day in each subsequent month that is the same calendar day as the day on which the Warranty Start Date falls, or the first day of the next following month if the Warranty Start Date falls on a day not present in any particular month. For example, if the Warranty Start Date is January 10, one Elapsed Month will have occurred on each of February 10 and March 10, but if the Warranty Start Date is January 29, one Elapsed Month will have occurred on each of March 1 and March 29.

In order to assess and process any Lamp Driver warranty claim, Trojan Technologies requires the Customer to notify Trojan by submitting a completed Warranty Claim Form within one (1) month of the component failure. Failure to meet these terms will void the Lamp Driver warranty.

Limitations:

This limited warranty does not cover:
 Lamp Drivers that have been used with parts not supplied or approved by Trojan Technologies  Lamp Drivers that have been physically damaged or fail due to corrosion, improper installation, exposure to moisture or abnormal stresses
 Damage caused by power quality disturbances falling outside the acceptable voltage tolerance of the ITIC (CBEMA) curve referenced from IEEE Standard 1100-2005
 Costs related to troubleshooting, removal or installation  Damage caused by improper return packaging
 Taxes, duties or brokerage fees, if any.

The above warranty is the exclusive remedy for all claims based on a failure of or defect in a Lamp Driver, whether the claim is based on contract (including fundamental breach), tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties whether written, oral, implied or statutory. Without limitation, no warranty of merchantability or of fitness for a particular purpose shall apply to a Lamp Driver.

Trojan Technologies does not assume any liability for personal injury or property damage caused by use or misuse of a Lamp Driver. Trojan Technologies shall not in any case be liable for special, incidental, indirect or consequential damages, even if it has been advised of the possibility thereof. Trojan Technologies’ liability shall not, in any case, exceed the cost of the Lamp Driver.

Page 1327 of 1513 ends

Water
Confidence™
Warranties

Page 1328 of 1513 ends

Warranties
UV Intensity Limited Warranty
January 1, 2017

Page 1 of 1 ends

TrojanUV - A Division of Trojan Technologies Group ULC
3020 Gore Road, London, Ontario, Canada N5V 4T7 T 519.457.3400 F 519.457.3030 www.trojanuv.com UV Intensity Sensor Limited Warranty
TrojanUVSigna™
Warranty Coverage:

The following warranty applies to the Trojan Technologies UV Intensity Sensor (the “Sensor”) for the TrojanUVSigna. The warranty is only valid with respect to a new Sensor that is purchased as: (i) a component of a new system, (ii) a spare part shipped with a new system, or (iii) a purchased replacement component, and that is properly stored, handled and installed as specified in the Operation and Maintenance manual supplied with the system in which the Sensor is installed or as outlined in Product Bulletins. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, any excess vibration or improper operation of the Sensor shall void this warranty. In addition, Trojan Technologies shall not be liable for any Sensor failure which results from UV equipment not being operated and maintained in strict accordance with the instructions set out in the Operation and Maintenance manual or Product Bulletins.

In order to assess and process any Sensor warranty claim, Trojan Technologies requires the customer to notify Trojan within one (1) month of the failure and submit a completed Sensor Claim Form (See Attachment) otherwise the warranty shall be void.

Trojan Technologies reserves the right to require the Customer to return failed Sensors to Trojan Technologies’ facilities for inspection along with the operator’s log and maintenance records. Failure to return the Sensor or provide logs or records when requested shall void the warranty. Trojan Technologies will cover the return shipping expense.

Period Of Coverage:

Where a Sensor has been stored, handled and installed as specified in the Operation and Maintenance manual, and the relevant UV equipment has been operated and maintained in accordance with instructions specified in the Operation and Maintenance manual or Product Bulletin, and:

1. the Sensor fails within one (1) calendar year after the Warranty Start Date, Trojan Technologies shall provide the Customer with a replacement Sensor free of charge;

2. the Sensor fails after the first (1st), and before the fifth (5th), anniversary of the Warranty Start Date, Trojan Technologies shall provide the Customer with a replacement Sensor at a discounted price. The following formula is used to determine the discounted price for replacement Sensors:

Replacement Sensor Price = ((Number of Elapsed Months) / 60 x Sensor List Price) The “Warranty Start Date” is, in the case of a Sensor forming part of a new system installation or shipped as a spare part with a new system, the commissioning date of the new system and, in the case of a Sensor purchased as a replacement component, the shipment date of the Sensor. One “Elapsed Month” shall be deemed to have passed at the beginning of the day in each subsequent month that is the same calendar day as the day on which the Warranty Start Date falls, or the first day of the next following month if the Warranty Start Date falls on a day not present in any particular month. (For example, if the Warranty Start Date is January 10, one Elapsed Month will have occurred on each of February 10 and March 10, but if the Warranty Start Date is January 29, one Elapsed Month will have occurred on each of March 1 and March 29.)
Limitations:

This limited warranty does not cover:
 Sensor Calibration. Calibration is considered a routine maintenance item.  Sensors that have been used with parts not supplied or approved by Trojan Technologies.  Sensors that have been physically damaged or fail due to corrosion, improper installation, exposure to moisture, or abnormal stresses.  Costs related to removal, installation, or troubleshooting.  Damage caused by improper return packaging.
 Taxes, duties or brokerage fees, if any.

The above warranty is the exclusive remedy for all claims based on a failure of or defect in a Sensor, whether the claim is based on contract (including fundamental breach), tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties whether written, oral, implied or statutory. Without limitation, no warranty of merchantability or of fitness for a particular purpose shall apply to a Sensor.

Trojan Technologies does not assume any liability for personal injury or property damage caused by use or misuse of a Sensor. Trojan Technologies shall not in any case be liable for special, incidental, indirect or consequential damages, even if it has been advised of the possibility thereof. Trojan Technologies’ liability shall not, in any case, exceed the cost of the Sensor.

Page 1329 of 1513 ends

Water
Confidence™
Warranties

Page 1330 of 1513 ends

Warranties
Water
Confidence™
Warranties
Warranties
Performance Guarantee
Trojan Technologies certifies to El Centro that the TrojanUVSigna™ Disinfection Equipment supplied will disinfect to the limits of < 200 Fecal Coliform /100mL based upon a 30 Day Geometric Mean and provided the following criteria is upheld.

PEAK FLOW: 16 MGD
SUSPENDED SOLIDS: < 30 mg/L Based on a 30 Day Average
UV TRANSMITTANCE @ 253.7 nm: 62% Minimum
TROJAN LAMP HOURS: ≤ 15,000
DOSE: > 30 mJ/cm²
This performance guarantee is also contingent upon proper care and maintenance of the unit, as detailed within the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and the use of Trojan approved parts. The performance guarantee is specific to the plant treatment process and water quality reviewed at the time of bid and conditioned on the absence of water and operating conditions which may adversely affect the equipment provided, including water conditions falling outside of the parameters listed above.

Page 1331 of 1513 ends

Water
Confidence™
Warranties

Page 1332 of 1513 ends

Warranties
Site/Project Name:

Project/Serial #:

Part Number:

No. Installation Failure # Letter
123456789
101112131415
Notes:

Completed By:

Phone #:

Email:
* Submit failures on warranty claim form monthly otherwise warranty claim may be void.

On/Off
Cycles
Net Operating
Hours
Date Code and
Serial Number
* Items that are damaged, show signs of corrosion, have been exposed to water, or were not handled, installed, or operated according to the O&M manual are not valid for warranty.

For electronic copy of form please contact our Customer Care Representatives (CCR's) at [email protected] Date of Bank Position / Sensor # Module or Array Bank Hours at Install Bank Hours at Failure Complete all applicable info
Check one: Check one:

Warranty Claim Form
Lamp DriverLampUV Sensor
TrojanUV3000PTP
TrojanUV3000B
TrojanUV3000
TrojanUV3000Plus
TrojanUV4000TrojanUV4000PlusTrojanUVSignaTrojanUVSonus
TrojanUV - A Division of Trojan Technologies Group ULC3020 Gore Road, London, Ontario, Canada N5V 4T7 T 519.457.3400 F 519.457.3030 www.trojanuv.com January 1, 2017
Warranty Claim Form

Page 1333 of 1513 ends

Water
Confidence™
Warranties

Page 1334 of 1513 ends

Warranties
Recycling Program
for Trojan Customers.

Here’s How our recycling program works:
• Trojan Client Services provides you with a Lamp Recycling form to complete. The form includes such details as pick up address, contact information, lamp quantity, package dimensions, most recent sales order number, special shipping requirements, need for recycling certificate etc.
• Trojan Client Services makes arrangements with our Shipping Department for the pick up at your site.
• Lamps are then shipped from your site to the recycling facility for proper recycling.

According to 40 CFR 261.24 of the United States Environmental Protection Agency’s Federal Registry, most fluorescent lamps contain enough mercury to be considered a hazardous waste. If placed in a landfill, the mercury becomes an environmental threat that has the potential to migrate into air and water supplies.

Benefits of the recycling of fluorescent lamps include saved landfill space, reduced raw material production needs, and the prevention of toxic material from entering the environment.

Several years ago Trojan Technologies established a UV lamp recycling program for you, our valued customers. Lamps purchased from Trojan and authorized distributors are recycled at no cost to you.

Used lamps are delivered to one of two (2) USEPA-approved lamp recycling centers. We use the services of two companies, Environment Recycling and Fluorescent Lamp Recycling.

Contact your Trojan Manufacturer’s Representative
or our Client Services Department to take
advantage of this recycling program.
3020 Gore Road London, Ontario, Canada N5V 4T7
T. 519.457.3400 F. 519.457.3030 www.trojanuv.com
Lamp Recycling Program & Form

Page 1335 of 1513 ends

QUANTITY
PIECES PART #
[email protected]
1-800-591-0585
EMAIL completed form to:

FAX completed form to:

QUANTITY SKID OR BOX?
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS:

LAMP RECYCLING
Request Form
SITE NAME:

COUNTRY:

STATE/PROV:

DATE SUBMITTED:

DESCRIPTION OF THE GOODS TO BE PICKED UP
WEIGHT PER SKID OR BOX (lbs)

FINAL DIMENSIONS OF PACKAGED GOODS TO BE RECYCLED
DIMENSIONS (L x W x H) (inches)
PHONE #:

PICK-UP ADDRESS
COMPANY:

COMPLETED BY:

TOTAL WEIGHT:

FAX #:

ADDRESS:

DESCRIPTION OF GOODS
ZIP/POSTAL CODE:

CONTACT NAME:

ADDITIONAL ADDRESS INFO.
i.e. Hours of operation; lobby or
warehouse
3020 Gore Road
London, Ontario CAN N5V 4T7
www.trojanuv.com

Page 1336 of 1513 ends

Safety Data Sheets (SDS)

SECTION CONTENTS
Hg Lamps
ActiClean™ Gel
Mobil DTE 10 Excel 15
Food Machinery Grease
SAFETY

DATA SHEETS (SDS)
Water
Confidence™

Page 1337 of 1513 ends

Water
Confidence™
Safety Data Sheets (SDS)
Safety Data Sheets (SDS)

Page 1338 of 1513 ends

Hg Lamps SAFETY DATA SHEET
Trojan Technologies Group ULC
DC001401-001-01-01
2018-04
Sheet 1 of 9
Original Instructions
3020 Gore Road, London, ON
CANADA N5V 4T7
office (519) 457-3400
1 Product and Company Identification
Product identifier Low Pressure High Output Amalgam UV Lamp CAS # Mixture
Product use Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp
Recommended restrictions None known
Manufacturer information Trojan Technologies
3020 Gore Road
London, ON N5V 4T7 CA
Phone: 519-457-3400
Phone: 888-220-6118
Technical assistance #
Within North America
Outside North America
Phone: 866-388-0488
Phone: 519-457-2318
2 Hazards Identification
Physical hazards Not applicable to intact lamps.

Health hazards Not applicable to intact lamps.

Environmental hazards Not applicable to intact lamps.

WHMIS 2015 defined hazards
Label elements
Hazard symbol Not applicable to intact lamps.

Signal word Not applicable to intact lamps.

Hazard statement Not applicable to intact lamps.

WHMIS 2015: Health Hazard(s) not otherwise classified (HHNOC) None known WHMIS 2015: Physical Hazard(s) not otherwise classified (PHNOC) None known Hazard(s) not otherwise classified (HNOC) None known
Supplemental information None
3 Composition/Information on Ingredients
Components CAS# Percent
Indium 7440-74-6 <0.1
Mercury 7439-97-6 <0.1
Composition Comments *Lamp consisting of quartz glass containing mercury amalgamated with metal(s).

Page 1339 of 1513 ends

Trojan Technologies Group ULC
DC001401-001-01-01
2018-04
Sheet 2 of 9
Original Instructions
3020 Gore Road, London, ON
CANADA N5V 4T7
office (519) 457-3400

SAFETY DATA SHEET
4 First Aid Measures
Inhalation Not applicable to intact lamps.

Skin Contact Not applicable to intact lamps.

Eye Contact Not applicable to intact lamps.

Ingestion Not applicable to intact lamps.

General Information Burns caused by overexposure or severe injuries caused by fragment of quartz glass should be treated by a physician.

Ensure that medical personnel are aware of the material(s) involved, and take precautions to protect themselves.

If you feel unwell, seek medical advice (show the label where possible).

Show this safety data sheet to the doctor in attendance.

Avoid contact with eyes and skin.

Keep out of reach of children.

There are no known health hazards from exposure to intact, un-energized lamps. 5 Fire Fighting Measures
Flammable properties Not flammable by WHMIS/OSHA criteria.

Suitable extinguishing media Extinguishing powder, foam, or water.

Unsuitable extinguishing media Not available
Specific hazards arising from
the chemical
Not available
Special protective equipment
and precautions for firefighters
Self-contained breathing apparatus and full protective clothing must be worn in case of fire.

Specific methods Use standard firefighting procedures and consider the hazards of other involved materials.

General fire hazards No unusual fire or explosion hazards noted.

Hazardous combustion May include and are not limited to: Mercury, metallic oxides.

Products Lamp is not combustible.
6 Accidental Release Measures
Personal precautions, protective
equipment and emergency
procedures
Keep unnecessary personnel away.

Do not touch damaged containers or spilled material unless wearing appropriate protective clothing.

Methods and materials for
containment
In the event of a lamp breakage, appropriate action should be taken to contain the amalgam mercury.

In a dry scenario where the lamp is not operating, solid amalgam mercury can be easily captured.

In an operating closed- or open-channel system, a lamp breakage inside an intact sleeve can be easily captured.

In an operating closed- or open-channel system, in case of a lamp and sleeve breakage in a system treating the water flow, no containment measure is available.

Prevent entry of the solid amalgam mercury into waterways, sewers, or other catchment systems.

Methods and materials for
cleanup
If lamps are broken, ventilate the area where the breakage occurred.

Take the usual precautions for collecting broken glass.

Clean up with a mercury vacuum cleaner or with other suitable means that avoids dust and mercury vapor generation.

DO NOT USE A STANDARD VACUUM.

Page 1340 of 1513 ends
← All documents from this meeting